SNA6000A Series
Vector Network Analyzer
User Manual
EN01A

SNA6000A User ManualContent
Content .......................................................................................................................................... 1
1

Copyright ............................................................................................................................. 10

2

Safety Requirement ............................................................................................................ 11

3

2.1

Safety terms and symbols ...................................................................................... 11

2.2

Operating environment ........................................................................................... 12

2.3

Cooling requirement ............................................................................................... 13

2.4

AC power supply .................................................................................................... 13

2.5Power supply and grounding .................................................................................. 13

2.6

Calibration............................................................................................................... 14

2.7

Cleaning.................................................................................................................. 14

2.8

Exceptional conditions ............................................................................................ 14

Product Introduction........................................................................................................... 15
3.1

General Description ................................................................................................ 15

3.2

Features.................................................................................................................. 15

4

User Manual Overview ........................................................................................................ 17

5

Quick Start ........................................................................................................................... 19
5.1

Dimensions ............................................................................................................. 195.2Power supply .......................................................................................................... 20

5.3

Front panel.............................................................................................................. 21
5.3.1

Power switch ......................................................................................................... 24

5.3.2

RF connectors ....................................................................................................... 25

5.4

Rear and side panels.............................................................................................. 26

5.5

OCXO option installation guide .............................................................................. 29

5.6

User interface ......................................................................................................... 31
5.6.1

Active entry............................................................................................................ 32

5.6.2

Value of marker ..................................................................................................... 32

5.6.3

Trace State ............................................................................................................ 32

5.6.4

Channel State........................................................................................................ 33

5.6.5

Hardkeys ............................................................................................................... 33

5.6.6

Function Keys........................................................................................................ 33

5.6.7

Label Page ............................................................................................................ 34

5.6.8

Window State ........................................................................................................ 34

5.6.9

Stimulus Range ..................................................................................................... 34

5.6.10Status Bar .............................................................................................................. 34

5.6.11

Message Bar ......................................................................................................... 35

www.siglent.com

1

SNA6000A User Manual

6

Graffiti Function ..................................................................................................... 35

5.6.13

Theme Management ............................................................................................. 38

5.7

Touch Screen .......................................................................................................... 42

5.8

Help Information ..................................................................................................... 42

Set Up a Measurement ....................................................................................................... 43
6.1

Measurement Classes ............................................................................................ 43

6.2

Measurement parameters ...................................................................................... 44

6.3

6.4

6.5

6.6

6.7

6.8

2

5.6.12

6.2.1

S parameters ......................................................................................................... 44

6.2.2

Balanced Measurement ........................................................................................ 45

6.2.3

Receiver Measurement ......................................................................................... 53

6.2.4

Wave (Receivers notation) .................................................................................... 53

6.2.5

Ratio ...................................................................................................................... 55

Frequency range .................................................................................................... 55
6.3.1

Set the frequency range ........................................................................................ 55

6.3.2

CW time sweep or power sweep........................................................................... 56

6.3.3

Frequency resolution ............................................................................................. 57

Power level ............................................................................................................. 57
6.4.1

Coupled port power ............................................................................................... 57

6.4.2

Power Leveling and Offsets overview ................................................................... 58

6.4.3

Power Offsets and Limits setting ........................................................................... 58

Sweep ..................................................................................................................... 59
6.5.1

Points .................................................................................................................... 59

6.5.2

Sweep type............................................................................................................ 60

Trigger..................................................................................................................... 63
6.6.1

Trigger Settings ..................................................................................................... 63

6.6.2

Trigger source ....................................................................................................... 64

6.6.3

Trigger Range ....................................................................................................... 64

6.6.4

Channel Settings ................................................................................................... 65

6.6.5

Trigger mode ......................................................................................................... 65

6.6.6

External and auxiliary triggers ............................................................................... 67

Data format ............................................................................................................. 70
6.7.1

Display format ....................................................................................................... 70

6.7.2

Cartesian coordinates display format .................................................................... 70

6.7.3

Polar coordinates .................................................................................................. 72

6.7.4

Smith circle diagram .............................................................................................. 73

Scale ....................................................................................................................... 75
6.8.1

Scale/reference level and position ........................................................................ 75

6.8.2

Scaling coupling .................................................................................................... 76

6.8.3

Electrical delay ...................................................................................................... 78

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual

6.9

6.10
7

6.8.4

Amplitude offset and amplitude slope ................................................................... 78

6.8.5

Phase deviation ..................................................................................................... 79

6.8.6

Divisions ................................................................................................................ 79

6.8.7

Scale type.............................................................................................................. 80

Avg BW ................................................................................................................... 80
6.9.1

Overview ............................................................................................................... 80

6.9.2

Averaging .............................................................................................................. 81

6.9.3

IF Bandwidth ......................................................................................................... 81

6.9.4

Smoothing ............................................................................................................. 83

Preset instructions .................................................................................................. 83

Measurement Calibration ................................................................................................... 86
7.1

Overview ................................................................................................................. 86

7.2

Calibration type ....................................................................................................... 87

7.3

Checking Calibration Status ................................................................................... 90

7.4

7.5

7.6

7.7

7.3.1

Execution Status of Error Correction for Each Channel ....................................... 90

7.3.2

Execution Status of Error Correction for Each Trace ............................................ 92

7.3.3

Acquisition Status of Calibration Coefficient for Each Channel ............................ 92

7.3.4

Procedure to turn on/off calibration property display ............................................ 93

Basic Cal................................................................................................................. 94
7.4.1

Open Response Calibration .................................................................................. 96

7.4.2

Short circuit response calibration .......................................................................... 97

7.4.3

Full 1 port OSL calibration ..................................................................................... 98

7.4.4

Transmission response calibration (two ports) ..................................................... 99

7.4.5

Enhanced response calibration (two ports) ......................................................... 100

7.4.6

SOLT calibration (two ports) ................................................................................ 100

7.4.7

SOLR unknown through calibration (two ports) .................................................. 102

7.4.8

TRL Direct Reflection Transmission Line Calibration (Two Ports) ...................... 102

7.4.9

Partial Overwrite calibration ................................................................................ 103

Cal Kit management ............................................................................................. 104
7.5.1

Overview ............................................................................................................. 104

7.5.2

Connector Tab ..................................................................................................... 105

7.5.3

Standards Tab ..................................................................................................... 107

7.5.4

SOLT Tab............................................................................................................. 109

7.5.5

TRL Tab ............................................................................................................... 110

7.5.6

Create a custom Cal Kit ...................................................................................... 114

Power Cal ............................................................................................................. 118
7.6.1

Internal source power calibration ........................................................................ 118

7.6.2

Receiver calibration ............................................................................................. 119

Port extension ....................................................................................................... 120

www.siglent.com

3

SNA6000A User Manual

7.8

7.9

7.10

8

Manual port extension ......................................................................................... 121

7.7.2

Automatic port extension ..................................................................................... 123

Fixture measurement function .............................................................................. 124
7.8.1

Port match ........................................................................................................... 124

7.8.2

Port impedance conversion ................................................................................. 125

7.8.3

2-port de-embed .................................................................................................. 126

7.8.4

N-port embedding / de-embedding ..................................................................... 127

7.8.5

Differential port match ......................................................................................... 128

7.8.6

Differential and common port impedance conversion ......................................... 129

Adapter removal / insertion function ..................................................................... 129
7.9.1

Adapter removal .................................................................................................. 130

7.9.2

Adapter insertion ................................................................................................. 131

Ecal ....................................................................................................................... 131
7.10.1ECal Overview..................................................................................................... 131

7.10.2ECal Config ......................................................................................................... 132

7.10.3

Confidence Check ............................................................................................... 133

7.10.4

Orientation ........................................................................................................... 134

7.10.5Characterization .................................................................................................. 135

Data Analysis..................................................................................................................... 137
8.1

8.2

4

7.7.1

Marker................................................................................................................... 137
8.1.1

Ordinary marker: ................................................................................................. 137

8.1.2

Reference marker: .............................................................................................. 137

8.1.3

Marker setting:..................................................................................................... 137

8.1.4

Marker Display .................................................................................................... 140

8.1.5

Marker function.................................................................................................... 140

Marker search function ......................................................................................... 141
8.2.1

Search domain .................................................................................................... 141

8.2.2

Max and min search ............................................................................................ 142

8.2.3

Peak search ........................................................................................................ 142

8.2.4

Target search....................................................................................................... 143

8.2.5

Multi-peak search ................................................................................................ 144

8.2.6

Multi-target search .............................................................................................. 144

8.2.7

Tracking search ................................................................................................... 144

8.2.8

Bandwidth search ................................................................................................ 145

8.2.9

Notch search ....................................................................................................... 145

8.3

Mathematical operation ........................................................................................ 146

8.4

Conversion............................................................................................................ 147

8.5

Equation editor ..................................................................................................... 149

8.6

Trace statistics ...................................................................................................... 158
www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual

9

8.7

Limit test ............................................................................................................... 158

8.8

Point Limit test ...................................................................................................... 161

8.9

Ripple limit test ..................................................................................................... 163

8.10

Bandwidth limit test............................................................................................... 165

8.11Time domain ......................................................................................................... 166
8.11.1

Transform ............................................................................................................ 166

8.11.2Gating .................................................................................................................. 168

8.11.3

Window ................................................................................................................ 170

8.11.4

Coupling .............................................................................................................. 172

8.11.5Marker ................................................................................................................. 173

8.11.6

Advance .............................................................................................................. 174

Save and Recall ................................................................................................................. 176

10 TDR Measurement............................................................................................................. 181
10.1

Overview ............................................................................................................... 181

10.2

Open/Close/Preset TDR Option ........................................................................... 182

10.3

TDR Setup Wizard................................................................................................ 183

10.4

Calibration for TDR Option ................................................................................... 184

10.5

10.6

10.4.1

Deskew................................................................................................................ 184

10.4.2

Deskew & Loss Compensation ........................................................................... 185

TDR Channel Setup ............................................................................................. 186
10.5.1

DUT Topology ...................................................................................................... 187

10.5.2

DUT Length ......................................................................................................... 187

10.5.3

Stimulus Magnitude in Time Domain .................................................................. 188

10.5.4

Port Impedance ................................................................................................... 188

10.5.5Velocity Factor & Dielectric Constant .................................................................. 189

10.5.6

Power Level......................................................................................................... 189

10.5.7

Average ............................................................................................................... 189

10.5.8IF Bandwidth ....................................................................................................... 190

10.5.9Trigger Mode ....................................................................................................... 190

TDR Trace Setup .................................................................................................. 190
10.6.1

Select a Trace ..................................................................................................... 190

10.6.2

Scale Management ............................................................................................. 191

10.6.3

Memory Trace Management ............................................................................... 192

10.6.4

Measure Parameter & Format............................................................................. 192

10.6.5

Stimulus in Time Domain .................................................................................... 193

10.6.6

Smoothing ........................................................................................................... 194

10.6.7

Trace Allocation ................................................................................................... 194

10.6.8Trace Setup Coupling .......................................................................................... 195

www.siglent.com

5

SNA6000A User Manual
10.6.9Time Domain Gating ........................................................................................... 195

10.6.10 DC Value ............................................................................................................. 196

10.7

TDR Data Analysis & Output ................................................................................ 196
10.7.1Marker Setup ....................................................................................................... 197

10.7.2

Rise Time Search ................................................................................................ 197

10.7.3

Delta Time Search ............................................................................................... 197

10.7.4

Peeling ................................................................................................................ 198

10.7.5File & Data Output ............................................................................................... 198

10.8

Eye Diagram Simulation ....................................................................................... 199
10.8.1

Overview ............................................................................................................. 199

10.8.2

Stimulus Bit Pattern ............................................................................................. 199

10.8.3

Stimulus Signal Setup ......................................................................................... 201

10.8.4

Eye Diagram Analysis ......................................................................................... 202

10.8.5

Eye Diagram Scale Management ....................................................................... 202

10.8.6

Mask Test for Eye Diagram ................................................................................. 203

10.8.7Jitter & Statistical Eye Diagram ........................................................................... 203

10.9

TDR Advanced Waveform Function ..................................................................... 205
10.9.1

View point ............................................................................................................ 205

10.9.2Emphasis/De-emphasis ...................................................................................... 205

10.9.3De-embedding ..................................................................................................... 206

10.9.4Equalization ......................................................................................................... 207

10.10

Hot TDR ................................................................................................................ 209

10.10.1 Overview ............................................................................................................. 209
10.10.2 Usage Guidelines ................................................................................................ 210

11 Spectrum Analyzer............................................................................................................ 212
11.1

Overview ............................................................................................................... 212

11.2

User Interface ....................................................................................................... 212

11.3

Create a Spectrum Analysis Channel .................................................................. 213

11.4

Spectrum Analyzer Settings ................................................................................. 214

11.5

6

11.4.1

SA Setting Tab ..................................................................................................... 215

11.4.2SA Tab Processing setup .................................................................................... 217

11.4.3

Source Tab .......................................................................................................... 219

11.4.4

Advanced Tab...................................................................................................... 221

11.4.5

Trace setup ......................................................................................................... 223

Spectrum Analysis measurement ......................................................................... 225
11.5.1Marker → SA ..................................................................................................... 225

11.5.2Channel Power .................................................................................................... 226

11.5.3

ACPR .................................................................................................................. 228

11.5.4

Occupied BW ...................................................................................................... 230

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual
11.5.5

TOI....................................................................................................................... 231

11.5.6

CNR ..................................................................................................................... 234

11.5.7

Spectrum Monitor ................................................................................................ 235

11.6

SA Trace operation ............................................................................................... 236

11.7

Correct .................................................................................................................. 238

11.8

Power calibration in SA mode .............................................................................. 239

11.9

Fixture measurement in SA mode ........................................................................ 241

12 Frequency Offset Mode .................................................................................................... 242
12.1

Overview ............................................................................................................... 242

12.2

Frequency Offset Mode ........................................................................................ 242
12.2.1Frequency Offset settings ................................................................................... 243

13 Mixer Measurement........................................................................................................... 247
13.1

How to activate the mixer measurement .............................................................. 248

13.2

Configure mixer related parameters..................................................................... 249
13.2.1

Sweep tab ........................................................................................................... 251

13.2.2

Power tab ............................................................................................................ 252

13.2.3Mixer Frequency Tab ........................................................................................... 253

13.2.4Mixer Setup Tab .................................................................................................. 258

13.3

Noise suppression (optional) ................................................................................ 262

13.4

Source power calibration (optional)...................................................................... 263

13.5

Mixer calibration ................................................................................................... 263
13.5.1

Scalar mixer calibration ....................................................................................... 263

13.5.2Vector mixer calibration ....................................................................................... 265

14 Pulse Measurement .......................................................................................................... 268
14.1

Overview ............................................................................................................... 268

14.2

Open/Close Pulse Measurement ......................................................................... 268

14.3

Pulse Measurement Settings ............................................................................... 269

14.4

14.3.1

Pulse Measurement ............................................................................................ 269

14.3.2

Pulse Timing ........................................................................................................ 269

14.3.3

Properties ............................................................................................................ 270

14.3.4

Measurement Timing ........................................................................................... 270

RF&IF Path Gain dialog ....................................................................................... 271

15 Material Measurement ...................................................................................................... 273
15.1

Overview ............................................................................................................... 273

15.2

Create a MT Measurement .................................................................................. 274

15.3

Configure the Material Measurement Setup ........................................................ 275
15.3.1

Preset Tab ........................................................................................................... 275

15.3.2

Measurement Model Tab ..................................................................................... 278

www.siglent.com

7

SNA6000A User Manual
15.3.3Sample Holder Tab .............................................................................................. 279

15.3.4

Waveguide Gap Correction Tab .......................................................................... 281

15.4

Waveguide TRL Calibration .................................................................................. 281

15.5

Sample Measurement .......................................................................................... 284
15.5.1

Sample Installation .............................................................................................. 284

15.5.2

Sample Electromagnetic Parameter Measurement ............................................ 285

16 Gain Compression Measurement.................................................................................... 288
16.1

Overview ............................................................................................................... 288

16.2

Create a GC Measurement .................................................................................. 288

16.3

Gain Compression Parameters ............................................................................ 289

16.4

Configure the Gain Compression Setup .............................................................. 290
16.4.1Frequency Tab..................................................................................................... 290

16.4.2

Power Tab ........................................................................................................... 291

16.4.3Compression Tab ................................................................................................ 292

16.5

SMART Sweep Safe Mode................................................................................... 293

16.6

Gain Compression Calibration ............................................................................. 294

17 External Switch Matrices .................................................................................................. 297
17.1

Overview ............................................................................................................... 297

17.2

External Matrix switches Introduction................................................................... 297

17.3

Matrix setup step .................................................................................................. 298
17.3.1Required equipment ............................................................................................ 298

17.3.2

Establish the physical connection ....................................................................... 298

17.3.3

Define the RF configuration ................................................................................ 300

17.3.4

Setting S Parameters .......................................................................................... 302

17.3.5

Calibrate and measure ........................................................................................ 303

18 System setting................................................................................................................... 304
18.1

18.2

8

System Configuration ........................................................................................... 305
18.1.1

Firmware upgrade ............................................................................................... 305

18.1.2File Browser ........................................................................................................ 305

18.1.3Date/Time setting ................................................................................................ 305

18.1.4

Screenshot setting .............................................................................................. 306

18.1.5

Screensaver ........................................................................................................ 306

18.1.6

System language ................................................................................................ 306

18.1.7

Power .................................................................................................................. 306

Communication interface setting .......................................................................... 307
18.2.1LAN Status .......................................................................................................... 307

18.2.2mDNS Setting...................................................................................................... 307

18.2.3

LXI ....................................................................................................................... 307

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual
18.2.4VNC Setting......................................................................................................... 308

18.2.5Web Setting ......................................................................................................... 308

18.2.6

GPIB .................................................................................................................... 308

18.2.7

Net Storage ......................................................................................................... 308

18.2.8External Device ................................................................................................... 310

18.3

Preset ................................................................................................................... 311

18.4

Factory Reset ....................................................................................................... 312

18.5

Help information ................................................................................................... 312
18.5.1

Help and About .................................................................................................... 312

18.5.2Message Setting ................................................................................................. 313

18.5.3

View Message ..................................................................................................... 313

18.6

Buzzer................................................................................................................... 313

18.7

Self-Test ................................................................................................................ 313
18.7.1

Key and touch screen test ................................................................................... 313

18.8

Options ................................................................................................................. 314

18.9

External Ports ....................................................................................................... 314

19 Service and Support ......................................................................................................... 315
19.1

Ordering and activating the options ..................................................................... 315

19.2

Warranty overview ................................................................................................ 316

19.3

Contact SIGLENT ................................................................................................. 316

www.siglent.com

9

SNA6000A User Manual

1 Copyright⚫

SIGLENT TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD All Rights Reserved.

⚫

SIGLENT is the registered trademark of SIGLENT TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

⚫

Information in this publication replaces all previously corresponding material.

⚫

SIGLENT reserves the right to modify or change parts of or all the specifications or pricing
policies at the company’s sole decision.

⚫

Any method of copying, extracting, or translating the contents of this manual is not allowed
without the permission of SIGLENT.

10

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual

2 Safety Requirement
This section contains information and warnings that must be observed to keep the instrument
operating under the corresponding safety conditions. In addition to the safety precautions specified inthis section, you also have to follow common safe operating procedures.

2.1 Safety terms and symbols
When the following terms or symbols appear on the front panel, rear panel, or this manual, it
indicates particular attention should be paid.

Indicates potential injuries or hazards that may happen.

Indicates electric shock that may happen.

Indicates measurement grounding

Indicates safety grounding.
This is a start/standby switch. Press the switch, the VNA will switch between theworking state and the standby state. The switch could not power off the device, tocompletely power off the VNA, the power cord must be removed from the ACsocket.
Indicates “AC”.

CAUTION

Indicates potential damages to the instrument or other property that may happen.

WARNING

Indicates potential injuries or hazards that may happen.

www.siglent.com

11

SNA6000A User Manual

2.2 Operating environment
Use in a clean and dry indoor environment with an ambient temperature range from 0°C to 40°C.
Note: Direct sunlight, electric heaters, and other direct heat sources, should be considered whenevaluating the ambient temperature.

WARNING: Do not operate the VNA in an explosive, dusty or humid environment.

This instrument meets the EN 61010-1 standard, and has the following restrictions:
Installation (overvoltage) category: Class II (electric supply connector) and Class I (measure terminal)
Pollution level: Class II
Protection level: Class I

Note:
Installation (overvoltage) category Class II indicates the local supply level is suitable for equipment
connected to the AC power supply.
Installation (overvoltage) category Class I indicates the signal levels suitable for terminals connectedto the RF source.
Pollution level Class II indicates it only occurs in a dry and non-conductive environment, sometimes
we should consider the temporary conductivity caused by concentration.
Protection level Class I indicates grounding equipment, it prevents electric shock by connecting theequipment to the ground wire.

CAUTION: Do not apply excessive pressure or strike the surface of the touch
screen.

CAUTION: Do not exceed the maximum voltage marked on the front panel
connectors.

12

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual

2.3 Cooling requirement
This instrument is cooled through a built-in fan. To keep adequate ventilation, a gap of at least 15 cm
should be left on both sides, as well as the front and rear panels of the instrument.

CAUTION: Do not block the vents located along the side and real panel of the
instrument.

CAUTION: Do not let any external objects enter the instrument through the vents.

2.4 AC power supply
The instrument accepts 100-240V, 50/60/400Hz AC power. The maximum power consumption is
90W with complete options.
Note: The instrument can operate within the following input ranges:

Voltage range:

90 - 264 Vrms

90 - 132 Vrms

Frequency range:

47 - 63 Hz

380 - 420 Hz

2.5 Power supply and grounding
The instrument has a three-terminal plug and an IEC320 (Type C13) standard connector for the input
power and grounding connections. The grounding terminal on the socket is directly connected to the
instrument shell. To prevent electric shock, the plug must be inserted into a well-grounded socket.
Please use the power cord provided to connect the instrument to the power source.

WARNING: Danger of electric shock!
Disconnected or broken internal or external grounding wires will increase the riskof electric shock. It is strictly forbidden to destroy the protective grounding wireor safety grounding terminals.

www.siglent.com

13

SNA6000A User Manual
The location of the instrument should be convenient to access the power supply. To completely
power off the instrument, the power cord should be removed from the power socket of the instrument.
When the instrument is idle for long durations, it is recommended to unplug the power cord from the
AC socket.

CAUTION: The RF connector’s shell on the front panel is connected to the
instrument’s shell, and then connected to the earth ground.

2.6 Calibration
The recommended calibration cycle is one year. Calibration should only be performed by qualified
personnel.

2.7 Cleaning
Only a soft damp cloth without any chemical/corrosive substances can be used to clean the
instrument. Do not clean or use the product in wet environments. To avoid electric shock, unplug thepower cord from the AC socket before cleaning.

WARNING: Danger of electric shock!
Do not disassemble the instrument. Maintenance must be carried out by qualified
personnel only.

2.8 Exceptional conditions
Use the instrument only for the purpose specified by the manufacturer. Do not use if the instrument
has visible damage or has endured severe transportation vibration. If the device is suspected to bedamaged, please disconnect the power cord and contact your local SIGLENT office. To operate theinstrument correctly, all instructions and marks should be read carefully.
WARNING: Use of the instrument for purposes unspecified by the manufacturer
may damage the instrument.

14

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual

3 Product Introduction
3.1 General Description
The SNA6000A series of vector network analyzers includes the following models: SNA6022A,
SNA6122A,SNA6024A,SNA6124A,SNA6032A,SNA6132A,SNA6034A,SNA6134A.That have afrequency range of 100kHz to 26.5GHz,which support 2/4-port scattering, differential, and timedomain parameter measurements. The SNA6000A series are ideal for determining the Q-factor,
bandwidth, and insertion loss of a filter. They feature impedance conversion, movement of
measurement plane, limit testing, ripple test, fixture simulation, and adapter removal / insertion
adjustments. The VNAs have five sweep types: Linear-Frequency mode, Log-Frequency mode,
Power-Sweep mode, CW-Time mode, and Segment-Sweep mode. They also support scatteringparameter correction of SOLT, SOLR, TRL, Response, and Enhanced Response for increased
flexibility in R&D and manufacturing applications. The frequency range of each model is shown in thetable below.
Model

Ports

Frequency range

SNA6022A

2

100kHz-13.5GHz

SNA6122A

2（Including front panel jumper interface）

100kHz-13.5GHz

SNA6024A

4

100kHz-13.5GHz

SNA6124A

4（Including front panel jumper interface）

100kHz-13.5GHz

SNA6032A

2

100kHz-26.5GHz

SNA6132A

2（Including front panel jumper interface）

100kHz-26.5GHz

SNA6034A

4

100kHz-26.5GHz

SNA6134A

4（Including front panel jumper interface）

100kHz-26.5GHz

3.2 Features◆

Frequency range: 100 kHz-26.5GHz◆

Ports: 2/4

www.siglent.com

15

SNA6000A User Manual◆Frequency resolution: 1 Hz◆

Level resolution: 0.05 dB◆

Range of IFBW: 10 Hz-3 MHz◆

Setting range of output level : -55 dBm ~ +10 dBm◆

Dynamic range: 135 dB◆

Trace noise: 0.003 dBrms, 0.05 rms◆

Types of calibration:
Response calibration, Enhanced Response calibration, Full-one port calibration, Full-two port
calibration, Full-three port calibration, Full-four port calibration, TRL calibration◆

Types of measurement:
Scattering-parameter Measurement, Differential-parameter Measurement, Receiver
Measurement, Time-Domain parameter analysis, Limit test, Ripple test, Impedance conversion,
Fixture simulation, Adapter Removal/Insertion, Spectrum Analysis, Frequency Offset, Scalar
Mixer Measurement, Pulse Measurement.

◆

Optional Bias-Tees◆Interface: LAN, USB Device, USB Host (USB-GPIB)◆

Remote control:
SCPI / LabVIEW / IVI based on USB-TMC / VXI-11 / Socket / Telnet / Webserver.

◆

Touch control:
Multi Touch，Mouse，Keyboard◆

12.1-inch touch screen◆

Video output: HDMI

16

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual

4 User Manual Overview
Main Contents
Chapter1.

Copyright

Chapter2.

Safety Requirement

Chapter3.

Product Introduction

This chapter introduces the characteristic index and function of vector network analysis.
Chapter4.

User Manual Overview

This chapter introduces the chapters of the user manual.
Chapter5.

Quick Start

This chapter introduces the appearance and size of the vector network analyzer, the basic
operation of the front and rear panels, user interface, buttons, and touch screen.
Chapter6.

Set Up a Measurement

This chapter describes the measurement function, sweeping trigger setting, and other functionsof the vector network analyzer, and introduces the functions under each menu in detail.
Chapter7.

Measurement Calibration

This chapter introduces the different calibration methods of S parameters, power calibration
methods, test fixture, and other functions of vector network analyzer in detail.
Chapter8.

Data Analysis

This chapter introduces the mathematical analysis function, including time-domain analysis,
windows, coupling, markers, and other functions.
Chapter9.

Save and Recall

This chapter introduces the data save and recall processes.
Chapter10. TDR Measurement
This chapter introduces how to use the TDR option.
Chapter11. Spectrum Analyzer
This chapter introduces how to use the SA option.
Chapter12. Frequency Offset Mode
This chapter introduces the function of SNA Sources tune to frequencies that are different(offset) from the VNA Receivers.

www.siglent.com

17

SNA6000A User Manual
Chapter13. Mixer Measurements
This chapter introduces how to do the Scalar Mixer Measurement or Vector Mixer Measurement.
Chapter14. Pulse Measurement
This chapter introduces how to use pulse measurements to test some DUT that cannot be tested
using continuous signals.
Chapter15. Material Measurement
This chapter introduces how to measure a material.
Chapter16. Gain Compression Measurement
This chapter introduces how to do the Gain Compression Measurement.
Chapter17. External Switch Matrices
This chapter introduces how to use external matrix switch for multi-port expansion.
Chapter18. System settingThis chapter provides information about the system settings.
Chapter19. Service and Support
This chapter provides information about service and support.

18

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual

5 Quick Start
5.1 Dimensions

Figure 5-1 Front view

Figure 5-2 Vertical viewwww.siglent.com

19

SNA6000A User Manual

5.2 Power supply
The equipment accepts 100-240V, 50/60Hz AC power supplies. Please use the power cord provided
to connect the instrument to the power source as shown in the figure below.

Figure 5-3 Power interface

20

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual

5.3 Front panel

Figure 5-4 Front panel

Table 5-1 Front panel area description:
Number

Items

Description
12.1 inch TFT color capacitive LCD touchscreen.
Notes: Avoid touching the LCD touchscreen with sharp objects.

A

LCD
Touchscreen

The effective pixel ratio of the screen is more than 99.998%, so it
doesn't mean a fault when the screen has some black / blue / green/ red fixed points less than 0.002%. Screen savers are notrecommended. The LCD screen is unlikely to suffer from image
burn-in.
Prev: Make the previous trace/channel/window active.
Next: Make the next trace/channel/window active.

B

Instrument

Trace: Call up the "Trace" function key menu to manage traces.
Channel: Call up the "Channel" function key menu to manage
channel.

www.siglent.com

21

SNA6000A User Manual
Meas: Set port S parameters, balance measurement, receive
measurement, wave measurement, ratio measurement, andmeasurement mode.
Format: Set the display methods for measurement parameters,such as Log Mag, Lin Mag, Smith, Polar, SWR, Phase, and otherdisplay methods.
Marker: Set up markers for measuring parameters, making it easy
to read the parameter measurement values at the specified
frequency, and move the frequency at the cursor to the left, middle,
and right of the screen, making the display results more intuitive.
C

Response

Math: Set measurement data to be stored in memory, perform
mathematical operations on current and historical data, and display
them. It can perform normalization operations on the data, perform
time-domain transformation analysis on measurement results, andother functions.
Scale: Set the display scale for testing measurement amplitude
Cal: Calibrate the S parameters and power of the equipment.
Search: Capture the maximum and minimum values of test
parameters, measure the Q value, bandwidth, etc. of the filter.
Avg BW: Average and smooth the test data, and set theintermediate frequency bandwidth of the receiver.
Start: Set the start frequency.
Stop: Set the stop frequency.
Freq: Set start,center,stop,span frequency, number of points, etc.
Power: Set the power level of the port's transmission signal, output

D

Stimulus

on/off, etc.
Sweep: Set log frequency and linear frequency display methods,
set number of points, sweep mode, sweep time, etc.
Trigger: Set internal and external trigger source, set ext trig output
on/off, and set hold, single, continuous trigger,and other methods.

E

22

Utility

System: Set the IP address of the device, display the system datetime, set the language, and turn on or off the buzzer. Equipment

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual
self test, etc.
Help: View help documents.
Preset: Initialize the device and restore the settings changed duringuse.
Display: Set the number of test windows and test traces.
Save Recall: Store the setting conditions in a storage device, orread the calibration data and trace data of the analyzer from thestorage device.
Touch: The screen touch function is turned on and off.
0-9: Selects values for measurement settings, then press Enter or
G/n - M/u - k/m to complete the selection.
decimal point: Enters a decimal point to designate fractions of awhole number.
+/-: Plus - Minus Toggles between a positive and negative value
entry if it is the first key pressed in the entry.
T/p 、G/n 、M/u 、k/m: Completes the value selection, assigninga unit of measurement.
T/p (Tera/piko) E12 or E-12
F

Numeric

G/n (Giga/Nano) E9 or E-9
M/u (Mega/micro) E6 or E-6
k/m (kilo/milli) E3 or E-3
Esc: Close dialog boxes
Back Space: Backspace. Move the cursor back and delete any
previous selections.
Tab: Switch touch screen focus
Enter: Enters the values that you select for the measurement
settings.
Up/Down buttons:

G

Navigation

1. When the focus is on the function key menu, press the up anddown arrow keys to select the function key (the selected menu
border is highlighted).

www.siglent.com

23

SNA6000A User Manual
2. When the focus is on the data input area (the data input field isdisplayed in blue), pressing the up and down arrow keys will
increase or decrease the numerical values in the data input area inlarge steps.
Left/Right buttons: Move the cursor horizontally in the data input
area
1. When the focus is on the function key menu (highlighted in blueon the menu border), turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise
to move the selection of the function key up and down.
H

Knob

2. When the focus is on the data input area (the data input field isdisplayed in blue), turning the knob clockwise or counterclockwise
increases or decreases the numerical value in the data input area
in small steps.
Includes four USB ports for data exchange and power supply withI

USB HubJ

Test Ports

Connect to the DUT for signal transmission and reception.

K

Power Switch

Power on/off the equipment.

peripherals. The total current of four USB ports is less than 2A.

Support the stability analyzer. The screen divider can be adjusted
L

Support Footappropriately for better operation and observation of the display
screen.

5.3.1 Power switch
Stand-by is indicated by a constant orange-colored power switch.
A single button press will cause the light to turn white which indicates the instrument is operating.
Continuous white indicates the instrument is operating.
A short press of this button (one second) causes the light to turn orange which indicates the
instrument is in the stand-by state after saving the settings.
A long press of this button (three seconds) will cause the light to turn orange which indicates the
instrument is in the stand-by state immediately without saving the settings.

24

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual

5.3.2 RF connectors

Figure 5-5 Front panel RF connectors (2-port VNA)

Figure 5-6 Front panel RF connectors (2-port VNA, Including jumper interface)

Figure 5-7 Front panel RF connectors (4-port VNA)

Figure 5-8 Front panel RF connectors (4-port VNA, Including jumper interface)●

The number of RF connectors is two or four, depending on the instrument configuration.

●

The presence or absence of jumpers is determined by some specific measurement function
options included with the network analyzer.

●

When an RF connector is transmitting an RF signal, the corresponding orange light above the RFconnector will be lit.

●

Do not apply DC voltage or current to the test port, as applying DC voltage or current can cause
equipment failure, especially when the capacitor remains charged. After fully discharging thevector network analyzer, connect the equipment to be tested to the test port. The maximum DC
input limit of the test port is 35V, and the maximum RF input power is 27dBm. Ensure that static
electricity is completely discharged from the human body and device components when operating
the equipment.

www.siglent.com

25

SNA6000A User Manual

5.4 Rear and side panels

Figure 5-9 Rear panel

Figure 5-10 Side panel
26

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual

Table 5-2 Rear and side panel area description:
Number

Items

Description
To connect the equipment to the power supply, a three pin
power cord with a grounding conductor provided must be used.
When it is necessary to cut off the power supply to avoid danger

A

Power Input

such as electric shock, the power cord plug (located at thepower socket or device end of the cord) must be unplugged. For
the steps to turn off the main power supply for normal use,please refer to the instructions on the power switch.
By selecting an OCXO constant temperature crystal oscillator

B

OCXO

with higher temperature coefficient and accuracy, a source
output signal with better performance can be obtained.

C

I/O data interfaceD

USB interface

Used for transmitting data.
Contains 1 USB device port for data exchange with external
devices.
Connect the vector network analyzer to the LAN through a
network cable, so that external devices such as PCs can accessnetwork interface

this device for information exchange. This 10/100Base-T
network interface has a standard 8-pin configuration andautomatic selection between two data rates.

USB interfaceE

DVI /DP interface

COM interface

Contains four USB 3.1 Gen 2 interface（H310 USB 3.1 Gen1）
For external display screens, 1x DVI-D: up to 1920x1200 @60Hz；1x DP 1.2: up to 4096x2304 @ 60Hz.
The serial interface used to connect devices.
A terminal used to connect an external HDMI display device. By

HDMI interface

connecting the external display device to this terminal, the same
information displayed on the host LCD touch screen can bedisplayed on an external color monitor.

Audio interfacewww.siglent.com

Audio input and output, Mic input, Audio Output.

27

SNA6000A User Manual
When the vector network analyzer uses the external trigger
signal for triggering, ExtTrig will be displayed on the status barat the bottom of the device screen.
Input power level:Low threshold voltage：1.1 V
TRIG IN
High threshold voltage：2.5 V
Input level range：0 to + 5 V
Pulse width: ≥ 2μs
Polarity: Positive or negative
This connector is used to output the internal trigger signal
generated by the vector network analyzer, so that it can be used
for triggering by other testing devices.
maximum output current: 20 mA
Output power level:
F

TRIG OUT

Low level voltage：0 V
High level voltage：3.3 V
Pulse width: 1μs
Polarity: Positive or negative
When a 10MHz external reference signal input is detected on
this port, the signal will be used as a frequency reference for thevector network analyzer. The characteristic impedance of thisport is 50 Ω, the input frequency range is 10MHz ± 10ppm, andthe input power range is -3dBm to+10dBm.

10MHz IN

Note: When a 10MHz external reference signal is input to thisconnector, the phase of the measurement signal output by thevector network analyzer will automatically lock to the reference
signal. When the external input reference signal does not exist,
the internal frequency reference signal of the vector network
analyzer will be automatically used. When the phase of thesignal transmitted by the system is locked to an external 10MHz

28

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manualreference signal, the ExtRef on the status bar at the bottom of
the device screen will be displayed in white. When it is notlocked, a Ref Unlock message will be prompted.
This connector is used to output the internal 10MHz reference
signal generated by the vector network analyzer, so that thereference signal can be used by other testing equipment. By
connecting this connector to the external reference signal input
connector of other devices, the phase of the signal emitted by
10MHz OUT

the device can be locked onto the internal reference signal ofthe vector network analyzer, and can be used under thiscondition.
The characteristic impedance of this port is 50 Ω, the output
frequency range is 10MHz ± 5ppm, and the output power range
is -3dBm to+3dBm.
It contains four BNC connector, and the external voltage sourceis connected with this BNC connector, so that the DC voltage
can enter the test cable connected to the active equipment tobe tested such as amplifiers through this BNC connector, thusG

DC bias input

completing the power supply drive of the equipment to betested.
Note: Do not apply a DC voltage exceeding 35V, the DC current
must be less than the rated current of the fuse.

H

Fuse

DC biased protective fuse, maximum withstand current: 500 mA
A cooling fan used to control the internal temperature of theIFanvector network analyzer, which can exhaust the hot air in thevector network analyzer and cool the equipment components.

J

HandlePortable handle, convenient for equipment transportation andtransfer.

5.5 OCXO option installation guide
1. After the vector network analyzer is powered off, use a screwdriver to remove the cover at the
OCXO option located behind the vector network analyzer.
www.siglent.com

29

SNA6000A User Manual
2. Insert the OCXO module into the slot of the entire machine and secure it to the rear housing withscrews.
3. The vector network analyzer is powered on and the OCXO option can be used normally.

Figure 5-11 OCXO option installation guide30

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual

5.6 User interface

Figure 5-12 User interface

A. Active Entry Adding, deleting, marking, and taking screenshots to mark readings and display
information about marked points
B. Marker Readout Display information about marked points
C. Trace Status Display the current trace status
D. Soft Keys Touch screen buttons
E.

Soft tabs Display parameter format

F.

Window number View current window

G. Stimulus Range Display the set incentive conditions
H. Status Bar Display trigger modeI.

Message Bar Display date and error message

www.siglent.com

31

SNA6000A User Manual

5.6.1 Active entry
Table 5-3 Active entry description:
Functions

Functions Description
Recall the previous step.

Recovering the withdrawn operation.

Add a measurement trace.
Add a measurement trace in a new window
Add a measurement channel in a new window.
Add a marker.
Delete active window or trace.
Note: Keep at least one trace on the interface.
Save status, calibration data, and snp files, etc

Load status, calibration data, and snp files, etc

Screenshot

5.6.2 Value of marker
Display the frequency and reading of the marker.

5.6.3 Trace State●A trace is a series of measured data points. Up to 256 traces can be created. In addition, one
historical memory trace for each active trace can be stored and displayed. Mathematicaloperations can be performed on the current trace data and the historical memory trace.

32

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual●

Press the Display button in the front panel, and the Trace Setup menu pops up on the right sideof the screen to manage the operation Trace, such as adding a trace, deleting a trace, maximizing
the trace window, moving traces between Windows, keeping the trace to the maximum or minimum
value without displaying the current value, etc.

●

Select a trace line and press the Scale button to change the reference electric equalization
operation.

5.6.4 Channel State●

Channels contain traces. Up to 256 channels can be created. The channel setting determines how
trace data is measured, and all traces assigned to a channel share the same channel setting.

●Press the Display button in the front panel, and the Channel Setup menu pops up on the rightside of the screen. This can be used to manage operation channels, such as adding channels,
copying channels, and deleting channels.

5.6.5 Hardkeys
Using Display Setup in the Display submenu, you can set Hardkeys and open the virtual keypad on
the right side of the screen to operate the vector network analyzer without operating the function keys
on the front panel.

5.6.6 Function Keys
Table 5-4 Function Keys Interface Description
Functions

Functions Description

Log MagParameters are displayed in logarithmic amplitude mode.

Lin Mag

The parameters are displayed in amplitude linear fashion.

Phase

Displays the phase of the parameter.

Delay

Displays the delay of the parameter.

Smith

The parameters are shown in the form of a Smith chart.

Polar

The parameters are displayed in polar coordinates.

SWR

The parameters are shown in SWR.

www.siglent.com

33

SNA6000A User Manual

5.6.7 Label Page
Displays all parameter display formats supported by the vector network analyzer.

5.6.8 Window State●

Windows can be used to view trace data and up to 100 windows can be created.

●

Press the button of Display in the front panel and the Window Setup menu pops up on the rightside of the screen. It can be used to manage operation windows, such as selecting a window,
adding a window, deleting a window, maximizing a window, layout, and so on.

5.6.9 Stimulus Range
Displays the excitation signal set in the current window, including starting frequency, ending
frequency, internal source output power, etc.

5.6.10 Status Bar
Table 5-5 Status Bar Interface Description
Functions

Functions Description

IntTrig

Displays the current trigger mode.

Continuous

Continuous trigger, single trigger, and other trigger mode displays.

BW=10kDisplay of the current IF bandwidth.

C1·PortS parameter calibration data state loading display.
Display whether the internal source power calibration data state is

SrcCalloaded or not. A Gray dark shaded label represents an unavailable
selection/option.

RF On
IntRetUpdate On

34

Internal source output power ON and off, RF ON stands for ON.
A display that currently uses an internal or external reference
signal.
UI waveform update or not.

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual

5.6.11 Message Bar
Displays the current date information and error information during testing.

5.6.12 Graffiti Function
This product provides a basic graffiti function, which is used to draw graphics and mark informationon the main interface. This feature is great for annotating screenshots and adding important details
before saving.

⚫

Graffiti function menu bar

Figure 5-13 graffiti function menu bar
As shown in Figure 5-13, the graffiti menu contains functions of enable, edit, clear, save and call.

www.siglent.com

35

SNA6000A User Manual⚫

Graffiti Editing Interface

Figure 5-14 graffiti editing interface
As shown in Figure 5-14, the toolbar at the bottom of the interface displays a series of tools forgraphic editing:1.

Selection tool: A series of editing can be carried out after the drawing is selected

2.

Text tool: Add text notes in the interface

3.

Line tool: Add a line in the interface

4.

Rectangle tool: Add a rectangle to the interface

5.

Ellipse tool: Add an ellipse to the interface

6.

Curve tool: Draw a series of lines arbitrarily in the interface (double click the mouse/ double
click the finger on the screen to finish drawing)

7.

Delete tool: Delete the currently selected drawing

8.

Text color tool: Set text color (support graphics: text)

9.

Text size tool: Set text size (support graphics: text)

10. Background filling tool: Fill graphics background color (support graphics: text, rectangle,
ellipse)
11. Border color tool: Set the border color of graphics (support graphics: text, line, rectangle,
ellipse, curve)36

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual
12. Border line tool: Adjust the border line thickness of graphics (support graphics: text, line
segment, rectangle, ellipse, curve)
13. Exit editing tool: Exit the current editing state

Figure 5-15 Color selection interface
As shown in Figure 5-15, after calling out this interface, you can adjust the corresponding colors of
the graphics:
1.

Color shade selection tool: Mouse/ finger click to select the appropriate brightness of the color

2.

Color selection tool: Select a specific color

3.

Color transparency tool: Adjust color transparency (the more right, the lower colortransparency)

www.siglent.com

37

SNA6000A User Manual

Figure 5-16 Line thickness adjustment interface
As shown in Figure 5-16, you can adjust the line thickness at the edge of the graph by calling out thisinterface. The larger the value is, the thicker the line will be.

⚫

Save/Recall

Click the save menu button to save the current graffiti content as a file with *.GFT as the fileextension.

5.6.13 Theme Management
In the "Theme Management" panel, instrument provides display configuration options for themeasurement panel, allowing you to flexibly configure parameters such as trace color thickness, XY
axis font style, and view grid style.

Figure 5-17 The Measurement Panel
A. Trace Title Bar
B. Response Axis/Left Axis
38

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual
C. Plot Grid
D. Marker
E. Marker Info Bar
F. Trace Line
G. Stimulus Axis/Bottom Axis
Press the “Display”button on the front panel → “View Settings” →“ThemeManager…” to enter the "Theme Management" panel. instrument supports importing and saving
themes. Select a specific theme from the theme drop-down menu to configure the measurement
panel display parameters in one step. After completing the new theme configuration, click "Copy..."and then set a new name to add the current theme to the theme drop-down menu. Click "Delete" todelete the current topic from the theme drop-down menu.

Figure 5-18 Theme Management Panel
A. theme drop-down menu
B. "Copy...", save current theme
C. "Delete", delete current theme
D. Style Settings
E. Color Settings
5.6.13.1 Style Settings
Click on "Style Settings" to enter the style setting interface, with the following options:⚫

Plot Grid"Window" → "Plot Grid" to enter the plot grid style setting menu, where you can set the grid line

style and width. The grid line style menu bar has five styles to choose from: solid, dash, dot, dashdot, and dash-dot-dot.

www.siglent.com

39

SNA6000A User Manual

Figure 5-19 Choosing The Line Style With “dash” In The Plot Grid Menu⚫

Marker"Window" → "Marker" to enter the marker style setting menu, where you can set the font size,

font style and font weight of the marker. The font style can be selected as normal or italic, and thefont weight can be selected as normal or bold. The settings for font styles are the same below.
⚫

Marker Info Bar"Window" → "Marker Info Bar" to enter the marker information bar style setting menu, where you

can set the font size, font style, and font weight of the marker information bar.
⚫

Response Axis
"Window" → "Response Axis" to enter the response axis style setting menu, where you can set

the font size, font style, and font weight of the response axis.
⚫

Stimulus Axis
"Window" → " Stimulus Axis" to enter the stimulus axis style setting menu, where you can set thefont size, font style, and font weight of the stimulus axis.
⚫

Trace Line"Window" → "Trace Line" to enter the trace line style setting menu, where you can set the traceline width.
⚫

Trace Title Bar"Window" → "Trace Title Bar" to enter the trace title bar style setting menu, where you can set

the maximum limit columns, minimum limit columns, maximum limit rows, font size, font style, andfont weight.

40

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual
5.6.13.2 Color Setting
Click on "Color Setting" to enter the color setting interface. In the interface, you can set thecolors of current traces, historical memory traces, measurement window backgrounds, grid lines, axis
text, and other objects. For the current trace and historical memory trace, you can choose eightcolors each, corresponding to Trace1-8 and MemTrace1-8. If the number of traces is greater than 8,
the color of the trace is Trace x% 8, where x is the serial number of the trace.
Click on the color box on the right, and the "Color Picker" interface will pop up. You can set thedesired color by moving the color panel circle and color axis ruler.
instrument supports importing and exporting color configuration files. Click on "Import" on thebottom right side and select the corresponding file to complete the color configuration in one step;
Click on "Export", select the save path and set the file name to save your current color configuration.

A. Objects with modifiable colors
B. Color Box, click to pop up the "Color Picker" interface
C. "Color Picker" interface
D. Import Color Settings
E. Export Color Settings
www.siglent.com

41

SNA6000A User Manual

5.7 Touch Screen
The vector network analyzer is equipped with a 12.1-inch high-resolution color touch LCD screen for
trace, function keys, and other measurement-related information. With the help of the touch screen,
the LCD screen can be directly touched by a finger to select measurement and parameter setting
operations.
●

When the Touch button display light is on, the touch screen function is on.

●

When the Touch button display light is off, the touch screen function is off.

●

Sliding the screen up and down to display the coordinates of the vertical axis can continuously
change the parameters of the vertical axis.

5.8 Help Information
The Help system of the vector network analyzer can provide the Help information of the function keys
and menu options on the front panel. Press the Help button on the front panel to enter the Utility
menu, click Help to open the Help document, click into the corresponding directory to view the
information.

42

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual

6 Set Up a Measurement
This chapter introduces in detail each function button on the front panel of SNA6000A series vector
network analyzers and the following menu functions.

6.1 Measurement Classes
Measurement Classes are categories of measurements that can coexist on a channel. Measurements
in a measurement class can not coexist in a channel with a measurement of a different measurementclass. For example, a Spectrum Analyzer measurement can NOT reside in a channel that is currently
hosting Scalar Mixer Measurements. And Measurement classes vary according to the Vector Network

Analyzers model and options installed.
Press the Meas> “S-Params” > “Mode…” to enter the Measurement class dialog, and the box shows
the supported classes for Vector Network Analyzers unit. except the “Standard (VNA)” class, all othermeasurement classes are commonly called "Applications measurement class". Measurement classdialog box shows the supported classes for Vector Network Analyzers unit. The supported classes depends
on the product and installed options. As figure below.

Measurment class select dialog

www.siglent.com

43

SNA6000A User Manual“Show Setup Dialog” check box is selected by default. Indicates that when a measurement class isselected to enable, the measurement configuration dialog box for the measurement class is displayed,so that users can directly set related parameters. If the check box is deselected, the measurementclass’s setup dialog box will not be displayed when the measurement class is selected.
“New Channel” check box is selected Indicates that create the measurement class in a new channel
and new window. A default measurement for that class is created in the channel.

6.2 Measurement parameters6.2.1 S parameters
S parameters are used to describe the degree of a transmitted or reflected signal through an
impedance discontinuity. S parameters are relative measurements, defined as the ratio of twocomplex voltages. They contain the amplitude and phase information of the relevant signals. For the
2-port vector network analyzer, there are 4 S parameters (S11, S21, S12, S22).
The specific meaning of each S parameter can be described by the following items:
Sxy x,y∈(1,2):x:

The response port is also known as the receiving port of the vector network analyzer.
The transmitted signal enters the port after passing through the DUT.

y:

The excitation port is also known as the transmitting port of the vector network analyzer.
The output signal of this port is provided to the DUT.

Here is a list of common Measurements with S-Parameters:
Reflection Measurements

Transmission Measurements⚫

Return loss⚫

Insertion loss

⚫

SWR

⚫

Transmission coefficient⚫

Reflection coefficient⚫

Gain/ loss insertion⚫

Input impedance⚫

group delay⚫

S11, S22⚫

Linear phase shift⚫

electrical delay⚫

S21, S1244

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual

6.2.2 Balanced Measurement
6.2.2.1

Balanced Devices

Standard Single-ended devices generally have one input port and one output port. Signals on the
input and output ports are referenced to ground. As Fig2.1 Balanced devices have two pins on either
the input, the output, or both. The signal of interest is the difference and average of the two input or
output lines, not referenced to ground, as Fig2.2.

V

DUT

V

Fig 2-1 Single-ended devices

V

DUT

V

Fig 2-2 Balanced devices

Differential and Common Modes Model
On balanced devices, the signal of interest is the difference and average of the two input or output
lines. In balanced device terminology, these signals are known as the Differential and Common
modes.
⚫

Signal A is fixed at 1V peak⚫

Signal B is selectable⚫

Differential is calculated as A minus B⚫

Common is calculated as the average of A and B

Input Signal A and B, A =1V, B=2V

www.siglent.com

Differential=(A-B), Common=(A+B)/2

45

SNA6000A User Manual
Input Signal A and B, A =1V, B= reverse phase 2V

6.2.2.2

Differential=(A-B), Common=(A+B)/2

Measuring Mixed Mode (Balanced) S-Parameters

The mixed mode S parameter is an extension of the conventional S parameter for balancemeasurement. If the measuring device is a balanced device, its mixed mode parameters can bemeasured by the VNA. Some balanced devices are designed to amplify the differential component
and reject the common component. This allows noise that is common to both inputs to be virtuallyeliminated from the output. For example, a balanced device may amplify the differential signal by afactor of 5, and attenuate the common signal by a factor of 5. Using traditional S-parameter notation,an S21 is a ratio measurement of the device Output/ device Input. Mixing this with balanced
terminology, we could view the amplifier's Differential Output signal/ Differential Input signal. To see
this parameter on the analyzer, we would select an Sdd21 measurement using the following
balanced notation:46

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual

The general notation for the mixed S parameter is Sabxy, where:1)

a - Represents the output mode of the device

2)b - Represents the input mode of the device
Choose from the following for both a and b⚫

s – single ended (unbalanced port)⚫

d – differential (balanced port)⚫

c – common (balanced port)

3)

x – device output “logical” port number

4)

y - device input “logical” port number

6.2.2.3

Measuring Imbalance Parameters

Imbalance is a measure of how well two physical ports that make up a balanced port are matched.
With a perfectly balanced port, the same amount of energy flows to both ports and the magnitude of
the ratio of these ports is 1. The notation is similar to traditional S-parameters. In the following diagrams,
the letters a, b, c, and d are used because any analyzer port can be assigned to any logical port using
the port mapping process.
For example, in the following single-ended - balanced formula, Sba indicates the device output port iswww.siglent.com

47

SNA6000A User Manual
logical port b and the input port is logical port a.
(1) Imbalance parameter when measuring a single -balanced device.

ImBal = −Sba
Sca

SingleBalance

Port bPort aPort c(2) Imbalance parameter of ImBal1 and ImBal2 when measuring a balanced -balanced device.

ImBal1 = −𝑆𝑎𝑐 − 𝑆𝑎𝑑
𝑆𝑏𝑐 − 𝑆𝑏𝑑

ImBal2 = −𝑆𝑐𝑎 − 𝑆𝑐𝑏
𝑆𝑑𝑎 − 𝑆𝑑𝑏

Logical Port 1

48

Logical Port 2

Port aPort cPort bPort dwww.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual(3) Imbalance parameter of ImBal1 to ImBal4 when measuring a single- single -balanced device.

ImBal1 = −Sac − Sad
Sbc − Sbd

ImBal2 = −Sca − Scb
Sda − Sdb

Logical Port 1

ImBal3 = −

Sca
Sda

ImBal4 = −

Scb
Sdb

Logical Port 3

Port aPort cPort bPort dLogical Port 2

6.2.2.4

Measuring CMRR

CMRR is a ratio of the transmission characteristic in differential mode over the transmission
characteristic in the common mode of the balanced port as the measurement parameter. A high value
indicates more rejection of common mode, which is desirable in a device that transmits information in
the differential portion of the signal. On the measurement balanced parameter TAB interface, click“Change” to set the DUT topology and port mapping relationship. Different DUT topologies lead todifferent CMRR parameters.

www.siglent.com

49

SNA6000A User Manual

The table below shows the CMRR parameters available when measuring different balanced device.
Balanced device.

CMRR parameters

Single- balanced device

Sds21/Scs21 , Ssd12/Ssc12

Balanced - balanced device

Sdd21/Scc21

Single- single- balanced device

Sds31/Scs31 , Sds32/Scs32

6.2.2.5

DUT Topology Port Mapping

In the balanced measurement, the signal of interest is the difference or average of two BALANCED
input or BALANCED output lines. It is also possible to have single-ended ports AND balanced portson the same device.
Press the “Meas” button on the front panel → Balanced → Topology... , Create or edit DUT Topology
and Logical Port Mapping. The port Topology / Logical port Mapping setting dialog box is as below:

50

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual

Logical Port 1

Logical Port 2“Logical Port” is used to describe a physical analyzer test port that has been remapped to a new port
number.
1.

Map any two physical ports of the vector network analyzer to a balanced logical port.

2.

Map any physical port of the vector network Analyzer to a single-ended logical port.

These selections apply to ALL measurements in the channel. If the device topology is changed, any
existing measurements in the channel that are incompatible with the new topology will be automaticallychanged to one that is compatible.
The following are the topological relationships of several common differential devices. A multi-port
vector network analyzer can be used to measure the following topological relationships for differential
devices. When the vector network analyzer has only 2 test ports, then only the first balanced device
under test can be tested. When the vector network analyzer has four test ports, then all the devices
under test with the following four topological relationships can be tested.
1)

Balanced
1 Logical port (Balance Port 1) - 2 physical ports (Port1, Port2)

www.siglent.com

51

SNA6000A User Manual
2)

Balanced-Balanced
2 Logical port (Balance Port 1, Balance Port 2) - 4 physical ports (Port1, Port2, Port3, Port4)

3)

Single - Balanced
2 Logical port (Balance Port 1, Balance Port 2) - 3 physical ports (Port1, Port2, Port4)

4)Single-Single-Balanced
3 Logical port (Balance Port 1, Balance Port 2) - 4 physical ports (Port1, Port2, Port4)

52

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual

6.2.3 Receiver Measurement
Each port of the vector network analyzer contains 1 reference receiver and 1 measurement reference
receiver. For the 4-port vector network analyzer, there are a total of 4 reference receivers and 4
measurement reference receivers. The power measured by these receivers can be compared toobtain all the S parameter indices.
R1, R2, R3, and R4 are the reference receivers used to measure the signal emitted from the vector
network analyzer. It is equal to the transmitted power at the port after power calibration.
⚫

R1: Measures the output power of port 1.

⚫

R2: Measures the output power of port 2.

⚫

R3: Measures the output power of port 3.

⚫

R4: Measures the output power of port 4.

A, B, C, and D are test receivers used to measure the reflected or transmitted signal power after
passing through the device under test.
⚫

A: Measures the signal power entering port 1.

⚫

B: Measures the signal power entering port 2.

⚫

C: Measures the signal power entering port 3.

⚫

D: Measures the signal power entering port 4.

6.2.4 Wave (Receivers notation)
Receivers can be also selected using logical receiver notation
Press the “Meas” button on the front panel → Wave → Other... to enter the Wave TAB interface.

www.siglent.com

53

SNA6000A User Manual

Logical receivers are generally represented by aN, M and bN, M forms.
⚫

aN - Represents Reference receiver for logical port N⚫

bN - Represents the test port receiver for logical port N⚫

M – Represents the Physical port number of the output power

For example:⚫

a1,1 Represents Physical port 1 outputs power when the reference receiver of logical port 1
is measured. When logical port 1 is mapped to physical port 1, it is equivalent to R1,1;⚫

a2,1 Represents Physical port 1 outputs power when the reference receiver of logical port 2
is measured. When logical port 2 is mapped to physical port 2, it is equivalent to R1,2;⚫

b1,1 Represents Physical port 1 outputs power when the test port receiver of logical port 1
is measured. When logical port 1 is mapped to physical port 1, it is equivalent to A,1;⚫

b2,3 Represents Physical port 3 outputs power when the test port receiver of logical port 2
is measured. When logical port 2 is mapped to physical port 2, it is equivalent to B,3;

54

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual

6.2.5 Ratio
Ratio measurement allow you to choose your own ratio of any two receivers that are available in youranalyzer. S-parameters are actually predefined ratio measurement. For example S11 is A/R1.
Ratio - Check Activate to create or change a measurement. Select a receiver for the Numerator,
select another receiver for the Denominator, then select a source port for the measurement.
The Source port is always interpreted as a logical port number.
For ratio measurement: "b2/a1,1" means that the logical source port number is 1, and the logical port
2 measurement receiver/logical port 1 reference receiver.

6.3 Frequency range
Frequency range is the span of frequencies you specify for making a device measurement.

6.3.1 Set the frequency range
Set the range of RF frequencies.
www.siglent.com

55

SNA6000A User Manual
Operating steps:
Press Freq on the front panel to open the frequency setting interface, parameter change mode:1.

Use the numeric keypad to input the value of the frequency and press the unit button to
select the desired unit. The optional units are GHz, MHz, KHz, and Hz. Press Enter to selectthe current unit by default.

2.

Press ENTER or the multifunction knob to enter the state of parameter editing. Move thecursor to the specified position by the left and right arrow keys. Modify the value by pressing
the up and down key, rotating the knob, or pressing the numeric keypad. Press ENTER, theknob, or ESC to exit the editing mode.

Note:
⚫

Start: Specify the starting frequency of the swept measurement range⚫

Stop: Specify the end frequency of the swept measurement range⚫

Center: Specify a center frequency of the swept measurement range⚫

Span: Specify the swept measurement frequency range⚫

Step: Specifies the frequency step size between data points⚫

Points: Specify the number of measurement points per sweep

6.3.2 CW time sweep or power sweep
Measurements using a CW time sweep or power sweep will be performed on a single frequency
rather than the entire frequency range
Operating steps:
Press Sweep, use the knob or arrow keys to focus on the Sweep → Sweep type. Parameterchange mode:1.

Press ENTER or the knob to enter the parameter editing state and then move the cursor to
the specified position by up and down arrow keys or the knob to set the Sweep type to CW
Time or Power Sweep. Press ENTER or the knob to select the current option.

2.

Press Freq use the knob or arrow keys to focus on the Freq → CW parameter entry. Selectthe edit box to enter the edit mode and change the value by pressing the up and down key,rotating the knob, or pressing the numeric keypad. Press ENTER, the knob, or ESC to exit
editing mode.

56

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual

6.3.3 Frequency resolution
Set the frequency resolution to 1Hz.

6.4 Power level
Power level refers to the output power at the port of the vector network analyzer.
Here are the keys to operation:
1.

Press Power , use the knob or arrow keys to focus on the Power → Power Level parameter
item. Input the required power level. Press ENTER to exit editing mode. The default unit is dBm.

2.

Press Power , use the knob or arrow keys to focus on the Power → RF Power parameter item.
Turn on or off RF power.

3.

Press Power , use the knob or arrow keys to focus on the Port Power parameter item,
Configure start and stop power. Start and stop power are only available in power sweep mode.

4.

Press Power , use the knob or arrow keys to focus on the Port Power → Select parameter
item, Press ENTER or the knob to select the corresponding power port.

5.

Press Power , use the knob or arrow keys to focus on the Port Power → Coupling parameter
item, Press ENTER or the knob to choose to turn coupling off or on.

6.

Press Power , use the knob or arrow keys to focus on the Leveling & Offsets → Slope
Enable parameter item, Press ENTER or the Knob to turn on the Slope switch, Press Leveling& Offsets → Slope to set the Slope.

6.4.1 Coupled port power●

Coupling (selected): The power level of each test port is the same. If the power of any test port isset, the power of all test ports will change accordingly.

●

Decoupling (clearing): Set the power level for each test port separately and decouple the Power.
For example, if you want to measure the gain and reverse isolation of a high gain amplifier, theinput port of the amplifier requires much less power than the output port. Power sweep can also
be performed using uncoupled powerwww.siglent.com

57

SNA6000A User Manual

6.4.2 Power Leveling and Offsets overview
Power Limits controls the source power at each test port for ALL channels. Use this feature toprotect DUTs that are sensitive to overpowering at the input. Source Power levels that exceed theLimit at the specified port are clipped at the limit, and an error message is displayed on the screen.
Power Offset provides a method of compensating port power for added attenuation or amplificationin the source path. The result is that power at the specified port, all dialogs, and annotations reflect
the added components. For amplification use a positive offset, and for attenuation use a negative
offset.
Using the Softkey for setting: Press the “ Power ” key, “ Power ” > Leveling & Offsets then enter the
menu.

A.

Select the Port.

B.

Slope Enable. Helps compensate for cable and test
fixture power losses at increased frequency. Withpower slope enabled, the port output powerincreases (positive input) or decreases (negative
input) with the sweep frequency.

C. Set the slope value
D. Set the power offset value
E.

Power Limit EnableF.

Set the power limit value

G. Power Offsets and limits

6.4.3 Power Offsets and Limits setting
Using the Softkey for setting: Press the “Power” key, “Power” > Leveling & Offsets > Offsets andLimits to enter the menu. You can change the cell value in one of the following two ways:
1.

On the UI interface, click the cell twice in succession and then enter the value in the pop-up
virtual numeric keyboard.

2.

58

Press the Tab key on the front panel to make the focus fall on the cell you want to change, press

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manualthe number key +Enter on the front panel to set the value, or turn the knob to change the value.

A

Global Power Limit. This sets a maximum source power level for individual test ports. Thisvalue limits port power for all channels and all applications. Power levels that attempt toexceed the power limit are clipped at the limit.

B

Power Limit Enable. Selects On indicate that power is limited to the adjacent value at the
specified source port and selects Off indicate that power is not limited to this value, but the
maximum power of the source.

C

Set the Source Power value.

D

Set the Power Offset value.

E

Set the Port Power value. The formula among Source Power, Power Offset, and Port Power
is: Source Power + Power Offset = Port Power

6.5 Sweep
Sweeping refers to the measurement of a series of consecutive data points against a series of
specified excitation values.

6.5.1 Points
Data points are the number of data samples representing the measured values at a single excitationwww.siglent.com

59

SNA6000A User Manual
value. You can specify the number of data points that the vector network analyzer measures in a
sweep. The sweeping time of the vector network analyzer varies proportionally with the number ofpoints.
Operating steps:
Press Sweep, use the knob or arrow keys to focus on the Sweep → Number of Points parameter
item, Enter the number of points required, Press ENTER to exit editing mode.
The number of data points collected by the vector network analyzer during the measurement sweep
can be set to any number between 1 and 100001.
Note: Maximum point limits may differ for some measurement classes.
⚫

For maximum trace resolution, use the maximum data points.

⚫

For faster throughput, use a minimum number of data points to provide an acceptable resolution.

⚫

To get the best number of points, look for values that do not differ significantly in themeasurement as you add points.

⚫

To ensure accurate measurement calibration, ensure that the user uses the same number ofpoints for calibration and measurement.

⚫

Points are the number of data items collected in one sweep. This number can be set separately
for each channel.

⚫

To obtain high trace resolution for excitation values, select a larger point value.

⚫

For high throughput, keep the smaller point value within the allowable trace resolution range.

⚫

For high measurement accuracy after calibration, use the same number of points as the actual
measurement.

6.5.2 Sweep typeKey operation:
Press Sweep, use the knob or arrow keys to focus on the Sweep → Sweep Type parameter item.
Press ENTER or Knob to enter the editing state, then move the cursor to the specified position by up
and down direction keys or Knob, set the sweep type to the required measurement type, press
ENTER or Knob to select the current option.
Sweep type:60⚫

Linear Frequency⚫

Log Frequency
www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual⚫

Power Sweep⚫

CW Time⚫

Segment Sweep

Linear Frequency: Set the measured abscissa frequency scale as a linear scale, and keep the full
frequency scale at equal intervals.

Log Frequency: Set the measured abscissa frequency scale to log scale, to observe a wider frequency
range, the calibration interval in the full frequency band is not uniform and presents periodic changes.

Power Sweep: The power sweep will increase or decrease the power of the source according to thewalk length. Power sweeping is used to characterize power-sensitive circuits through measurements
such as gain compression. In the Sweep Type dialog box, you can specify “Start Power”, “Stop Power”,“CW Frequency”, “Points”.

Segment Sweep: “Segment Sweep” activates a sweep consisting of frequency sub sweep (called
segmentation). For each segment, you can define a separate power level, IF bandwidth, IF bandwidth
for each port, sweep time, delay, sweep mode. After the measurement calibration has been performedon the entire sweep or all segments, the measurement values of one or more segments can becalibrated.

In the Segment Sweep type, the vector network analyzer performs the following operations.
⚫

Sort all defined segments in order of increasing frequency.

⚫

Measurements were made at each point.

⚫

Display a trace containing all retrieved data.

Limitations on segmented sweeping:⚫

The frequency range of one segment may not overlap with the frequency range of any othersegment.

⚫

The number of segments is limited only by the combined data points of all segments in thesweep.

⚫

The frequency range of one segment may not overlap with the frequency range of any otherwww.siglent.com

61

SNA6000A User Manual
segment.
⚫

The number of segments is limited only by the combined data points of all segments in thesweep.

Operating steps:
Press Sweep, Use the knob or arrow keys to focus on the Sweep → Sweep Type parameter item.
Parameter change mode:1.

Press ENTER or Knob to enter the state of parameter editing, then move the cursor to thespecified position by up and down arrow keys or Knob, set the sweep type as Segment Sweep,
and press ENTER or Knob to select the current option.

2.

Press Sweep, use the knob or arrow keys to focus on the Segment Table parameter item. Movethe cursor to the specified position by up and down arrow keys or knobs, set Add Segment, Insert
Segment, Delete Segment and Delete All Segments to perform segment operation. Select thesegment table for segment setting and tick the corresponding menu to display the corresponding
contents in the following segment.

Figure 6-1 Segment table

X-Axis Point Spacing: In segment sweep mode, this feature will affect how the segment trace isdrawn on the screen. This function is in the sub-sweep table menu.
⚫

When X-axis point spacing is not used, multi-segment sweeping traces may sometimes result inmany measurement points being squeezed into a narrower portion of the X-axis⚫

When X-axis point spacing is used, the X-axis position of each point needs to be selected so that
all measurement points are evenly distributed along the X-axis.

For example, suppose you have the following two sections:62

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual

Figure 6-2 X-point spacing is not used

Figure 6-3 Use X-axis point spacing

6.6 Trigger
The trigger is the signal that causes the vector network analyzer to carry out the measurement
sweep. The vector network analyzer is flexible in the configuration of the trigger function.

6.6.1 Trigger Settings
Operating steps:
Press Trigger, use the knob or arrow keys to focus on the Trigger parameter item.

www.siglent.com

63

SNA6000A User Manual

6.6.2 Trigger source
Operating steps:
Press Trigger, Use the knob or arrow keys to focus on the Trigger Source parameter item. Press
ENTER or the Knob to enter the parameter editing state, then move the cursor to the specified
position by the up and down arrow keys or the knob, and press ENTER or the knob to select thecurrent option.

Trigger source: These Settings determine the source of the trigger signal for all existing channels. A
valid trigger is generated only if the vector network analyzer is not sweeping.
⚫

Internal triggers: After the previous measurement is completed, the vector network analyzer will
immediately send a continuous trigger signal.

⚫

Bus trigger: The vector network analyzer waits for the SCPI trigger instructions issued by an
external controller (PC).

⚫

External trigger: Trigger signals generated by external devices received through the BNC
Connector on the rear panel.

⚫

Manual trigger: Manually send a trigger signal to the vector network analyzer. Available Only
when you select “Manual” to trigger.

6.6.3 Trigger Range
Operating steps:
Press Trigger, Use the knob or arrow keys to focus on the Trigger Scope parameter item. Press
ENTER or the Knob to enter the parameter editing state, then move the cursor to the specified
position by the up and down arrow keys or the knob, and press ENTER or the knob to select thecurrent option.
⚫

All channels: Triggers are sent to all triggerable channels. A trigger will sweep all channels thatcan be triggered. (Default setting)⚫

Current channel: Triggers are sent to the current channel but after the current channel
completes, the channel increments to the next triggerable channel.

64

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual

6.6.4 Channel Settings
Operating steps:
Press Trigger, use the knob or arrow keys to focus on the Trigger parameter item. Press ENTER or
the Knob to enter the parameter editing state, then move the cursor to the specified position by theup and down arrow keys or the knob, and press ENTER or the knob to select the current option.

These settings determine the number of trigger signals that the channel will receive.
⚫

Hold trigger: The channel does not accept any trigger signals.

⚫

Single trigger: The channel receives a trigger signal and then enters the “hold” state. Anotherway to trigger a single measurement: Set the trigger source to “manual” and send a manualtrigger. At this point, however, all channels are set to single trigger.

⚫

Continuous trigger: Channels accept an unlimited number of trigger signals.

⚫

Hold all channels: All channels enter the hold state and do not accept any trigger signals.

⚫

Restart: (Accessible only from the Trigger menu.) Channels that are in the Hold state are set to
be triggered once (The channel accepts a single trigger signal). All other Settings are unaffected.

⚫

A single trigger: The channel receives a trigger signal and then enters the “hold” state. Anotherway to trigger a single measurement is to set the trigger source to “manual” and send a manualtrigger. At this point, however, all channels are single.

⚫

Restart: Stops the currently sweeping Channel, and re-sweep when a new trigger signal is received.
Examples:1.

When the trigger source is internal trigger and the trigger mode is "Single" or "Continuous", clickthe "Restart" then the trace will re-sweep from the first frequency point.
2.

When the trigger source is Manual/External/Bus and the trigger mode is "Single" or"Continuous", click the "Restart" will stops the currently sweeping and re-sweep when a new trigger
signal is received.
3.

When channel in Hold mode, click the "Restart" does not do anything.

4.

Multiple Channels in Continuous mode: The current sweep on the current channel is stopped,

and the first channel that can sweep is started.

6.6.5 Trigger mode
Operating steps:

www.siglent.com

65

SNA6000A User Manual
Press Trigger, use the knob or arrow keys to focus on the Trigger → Trigger Setup parameter item.
Press ENTER or the Knob to enter the parameter editing state. Then move the cursor to the specified
position by the up and down arrow keys or the knob, and press ENTER or the knob to select thecurrent option.

These settings determine the number of trigger signals that the channel will receive.
⚫

Sweep trigger: Each “manual” or “external” trigger causes all traces of the shared source port tobe swept in the order specified below. In the case of a “single” trigger, the count decrements by 1
after sweeping all traces in all directions.

⚫

Point trigger: Each “manual” or “external” trigger results in a measurement of a data point.
Subsequent triggers go to the same trace until it completes, the other traces in the same channel
are then swept in the order specified below. If it is a "single" trigger, the count decreases by 1
after measuring all data points on all trace lines in the channel.

When multi-port calibration is on (requires multi-direction sweeping), the trace on the screen will not
be updated until all relevant directions have been swept. For example, when all four 2-port S
parameters are displayed:a)If full 2-port calibration is on, triggering 1 will cause no trace to be updated.

b)

When the calibration is off, triggering 1 will cause S11 and S21 updates. Trigger 2 will cause
updates to S22 and S12.

Trace sweep order:
For all trigger modes, the trigger signal remains in the same channel until all traces in this channel
have been swept, and then continue to trigger the next channel that is not in the "hold" state.
The traces within each channel are always swept in the following order:
The trace on the screen will not be updated when the multi-port calibration is turned on (requiring
multi-direction sweeping) until all relevant directions have been swept.

For example, when all four 2-port S parameters are displayed:a)If full 2-port calibration is on, triggering 1 will cause no trace to be updated; Triggering 2
causes all S parameters to be updated.

b)

When the calibration is off, triggering 1 will cause S11 and S21 to be updated; Triggering 2
will cause S22 and S12 to be updated.

66

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual

6.6.6 External and auxiliary triggers
Both external and auxiliary triggers are used to synchronize the triggers of the vector network
analyzer with those of other devices.
Overview:
Ready signal and trigger signal:
Ready signals are different from trigger signals. The ready signal is used to indicate that thetransmitting instrument is ready for measurement. The instrument receiving the ready signal thensends a trigger signal indicating that the measurement will be made or that the measurement has
been completed. Usually, the slower instrument sends the trigger signal.
⚫

Measurement trigger input: This signal is easy to use, but has limited configuration capabilities.

⚫

Auxiliary trigger outputs: Connectors and signals are highly configurable and can be used tosynchronize with any number of devices.

Measurement trigger input
The trigger input connector is located on the back panel of the vector network analyzer. Thesesignals can be used when the vector network analyzer communicates with slower instruments.
Operating Steps:⚫

The vector network analyzer sends a “ready” signal when it is ready for measurement⚫

The external device sends a trigger signal to the vector network analyzer when it is ready formeasurement⚫

Additional signals are provided on the vector network analyzer processor I/O to indicate that thevector network analyzer sweep has been completed and the processor can be set for the next
measurement.

To make the vector network analyzer respond to measured trigger inputs or processor I/O signals,
select External on the “Trigger Settings” tab on the “Source” Settings. Also, on the Trigger Settingstab, on the Range Settings, select whether an external trigger applies to all channels (global) or one
channel (local). The appropriate settings to apply are as follows:

Main trigger input:
Global/ channel trigger delay - after receiving an external trigger, the start time of the sweep will bedelayed by the specified amount of time plus any inherent delay.
www.siglent.com

67

SNA6000A User Manual⚫

When the trigger scope is “channel”, the delay value is applied to the specified channel.

⚫

When the Trigger Range is Global, the same delay value is applied to all channels.

The vector network analyzer receives the trigger input signal through the following connectors:⚫

Measure trigger input BNC connector: Trigger input on the rear panel.

⚫

Processor I/O Pin 18 (needs to be changed).

Polarity:High level: When the vector network analyzer is ready (trigger ready) and the TTL signal on theselected input is “high”, it triggers the vector network analyzer.
Low level: When the vector network analyzer is ready (trigger ready) and the TTL signal on theselected input is “low”, it triggers the vector network analyzer.
Positive edge: When the vector network analyzer is ready, it will trigger on the next positive edge.
When set to accept a trigger before ready, if a positive edge has been received since the last dataacquisition, the vector network analyzer will trigger immediately after ready
Negative edge: When the vector network analyzer is ready, it will trigger on the next negative edge.
When set to accept the trigger before ready, if a negative edge has been received since the last dataacquisition, the vector network analyzer will trigger immediately after ready.
After receiving the trigger selection before being ready, the vector network analyzer will move to theready state (trigger ready), if any triggers have been received since the last data fetch, the vector
network analyzer will trigger immediately and the vector network analyzer will remember only one
trigger signal. All other signals will be ignored.
⚫

If this check box is cleared, any trigger signals received by the vector network analyzer before it
is ready will be ignored.

⚫

This feature is only available when a positive or negative edge trigger is selected.

Auxiliary trigger
The auxiliary trigger connector is located on the back panel of the vector network analyzer. When theexternal source is configured as an external device, the vector network analyzer will automaticallycontrol all trigger settings. Do not set other trigger settings. The vector network analyzer will startmeasuring when it receives a valid trigger signal from the specified trigger source:⚫

68

Inside: Measurements begin immediately.

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual⚫

Manual: Press the vector network analyzer “Trigger” button to start the measurement.

⚫

External: The measurement starts when the measurement trigger input signal is received fromthe external device. This must be configured separately.

The “Auxiliary Trigger Output” signal can be configured to be sent just before the measurement isperformed or just after the measurement is completed. When communicating with an external source,
the “Auxiliary Trigger Output” signal should be sent after the measurement is completed to indicatethat the external source can be set for the next measurement.

Enable: When checked, the signal can be output to external devices using auxiliary connectors.
⚫

Channel: This setting is controlled by the vector network analyzer “Preferences” setting.

⚫

Global: All secondary trigger settings apply to all channels. On the Trigger Settings tab, set the“Each Point” setting, which also applies to all channels.

Channels: All secondary trigger settings will be applied to the specified channel and each channel
can be configured individually.

Auxiliary channel output (to device):
The following settings control the properties of the signal emitted from the “Auxiliary Trigger Output”
connector on the back panel:

Polarity:
Positive pulse: the output pulse is positive.
Negative pulse: The output pulse is negative.

Location:
Before acquisition: Send pulses just before data collection begins.
After the acquisition: Pulses are sent immediately after data collection is completed.
Each point: When checked, trigger output can be sent for each data point, and when cleared, trigger
output can be sent for each sweep.
Select “Auxiliary Trigger” - “Global” vector network analyzer preferences, on the “Trigger Settings”
tab, the “Dot” Settings are set. After that, this setting applies to all channels. When multiple channels

www.siglent.com

69

SNA6000A User Manual
exist, the channel settings set last are used.

Pulse Duration: Specify the duration of a positive or negative output trigger pulse.

6.7 Data format
The data format is the method by which the vector network analyzer displays the measured datagraphically. Select the data format that corresponds to the information you want to know about thetest device.

6.7.1 Display format
Operating steps:
Press Format, Use the knob or arrow keys to focus on the Format parameter item. Press ENTER or
the Knob to enter the parameter editing state, then move the cursor to the specified position by theup and down arrow keys or the knob, and press ENTER or the knob to select the current option.

6.7.2 Cartesian coordinates display format
Nine of the twelve available data formats use rectangular displays to present measurement data.
This display is also known as Cartesian, XY, or linear coordinates. The Cartesian coordinate display
is especially suitable for clearly displaying the frequency response information of the device-undertest (DUT).
⚫

The excitation data (frequency, power, or time) is linearly scaled and displayed on the X-axis⚫

The measured response data is displayed on the Y-axis

Log amplitude scheme:⚫

Display amplitude (no phase)

⚫

Y: dB

⚫

Typical measurements: Return loss, insertion loss, or gain

70

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual
Phase format:
The phase of the signal is measured relative to the calibration reference plane, within a range of±180 degrees.
⚫

Display phase (no amplitude)⚫

Y: Phase (degrees)⚫

Each 180-degree trace is “wrapped” for easy scaling⚫

Typical measurement: Linear phase shift.

A phase:⚫

Same phase, but no 180-degree entanglement.

Note: Phase unwrapping is accomplished by comparing the phases of two adjacent data points. If
the phase difference between the two points is greater than 180 degrees, or the DC offset
phase of the first data point is greater than 180 degrees, then the phase measurement may
not be accurate.

Group delay format:⚫

Displays the transmission (propagation) time of signal in the device⚫

Y: Time (s)⚫

Typical measurement: Group delay

Linear amplitude scheme:⚫

Only positive values are displayed⚫

Y: No Unit (U, suitable for proportional measurements)
Watts (W, suitable for disproportionate measurements)⚫

Typical measurements:⚫

Reflection and transmission coefficients (amplitude), time domain transformation

SWR format:⚫

Displays the reflection measurements calculated from the formula (1+ R) / (1-R), where R is thereflection coefficientwww.siglent.com

71

SNA6000A User Manual⚫

Valid for reflection measurements only⚫

Y: No units⚫

Typical measurements: SWR

Real number format:⚫

Show only the real part of the measured complex data⚫

Can display both positive and negative values⚫

Y: No units⚫

Typical measurements: Time domain, auxiliary input voltage signals for maintenance purposes

Imaginary number format:⚫

Only imaginary parts of the measured data are displayed⚫

Y: No units⚫

Typical measurement: Network impedance matching

6.7.3 Polar coordinates
The polar coordinate format is used to view the amplitude and phase of the reflection coefficients in
S11 or S22 measurements.
You can use a cursor to display the following items:⚫

Linear or log amplitude (in dB)⚫

Phase (in degrees)72

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual

Figure 6-4 Polar diagram⚫

The dotted circle indicates the reflection coefficient. The outermost circle represents thereflection coefficient with a value of 1. The center of the circle represents the reflection coefficientwith a value of 0.

⚫

The radial line shows the phase angle of the reflected signal. The right-most position
corresponds to the zero-phase angle (that is, the reflected signal has the same phase as theincident signal). The phase differences of 90°, ±180°, and -90° correspond to the top, leftmost,and bottom of the polar display, respectively.

6.7.4 Smith circle diagram
Smith diagrams are a tool for mapping complex reflectance coefficients to test the impedance ofequipment. In the Smith chart, the linear impedance plane is reshaped to form a cyclic grid fromwhich the resistance and reactance (R+ Jx) can be read.
You can use a cursor to display the following items:⚫

Resistance (in Ohms)⚫

Reactance as equivalent capacitance (in Ephraeras) or inductance (in Henrys)www.siglent.com

73

SNA6000A User Manual+jx

Zin=∞j
Γ=1
X=1
IM

R=1
(R=50Ω)
Zin=0
Γ=-1

.

R=0

-jx

Zin=50
Γ=0

R=∞
Zin=∞
Γ=1

X=-1
IM

Zin=-∞j
Γ=1

X=1
IM
R=1
(R=50Ω)

Short
Zin=0
Γ=-1

Load
Zin=50
Γ=0

Open
Zin=∞
Γ=1

X=-1
IM

Figure 6-5 Schematic diagram of Smith circle

There is also a Reverse Smith circle diagram (also called an Admittance Smith Chart):
Same as the standard Smith circle, with the following exceptions:⚫

The polar grid is reversed from right to left.

⚫

Admittance (in Siemens) instead of resistance.

Smith diagram interpretation:74

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User ManualConstant
Reactance

Constant
Resistance

Figure 6-6 Schematic diagram of Smith circle⚫

Each point on the Smith chart represents a complex impedance (r±jx) consisting of a real
resistance (r) and an imaginary reactance (x).

⚫

The horizontal axis (solid line) shows the real part of the difference between impedance andresistance. The horizontal axis always represents the system impedance. The rightmost value isinfinite ohms (open path). The leftmost value is zero ohms (short circuit).

⚫

The dotted circle intersecting the horizontal axis represents a constant resistance.

⚫

A dashed arc tangent to the horizontal axis represents a constant reactance.

⚫

The top half of Smith's circle is the region where the reactance component is positive and hence
inductance is generated.

⚫

The lower half is the region where the reactance component is negative and therefore generates
capacitance.

6.8 Scale
6.8.1 Scale/reference level and position
The “Scale”, “Reference Level”, and “Reference Position” Settings (as well as the format) determine
how the data trace will appear on the vector network analyzer screen.
Operating steps:

www.siglent.com

75

SNA6000A User Manual
Press Scale, Use the knob or arrow keys to focus on the reference level and reference position
parameter items under the Scale menu bar. Press ENTER or the knob to enter the parameter editing
state, then move the cursor to the specified position by the up and down arrow keys or the knob, andpress ENTER or the knob to select the current option.

Scale: Sets the vertical indexing value of the rectangular coordinate display format. In polar
coordinates and Smith chart formats, the scale sets the value of the outer perimeter. Range: 0.001
dB/div to 1000 dB/div. Scale do not apply in logarithmic scale type.

Automatic scaling: Automatically sets the vertical indexing value and reference value to fit the working
data trace in the screen grid area. The excitation value and reference position are not affected. The
vector network analyzer determines the minimum possible scaling factor that will allow all display data
to appear on the 80% vertical grid. The selected reference values center the trace on the screen.

All autoscaling: Automatically scales all data traces in the working window to fit vertically into thegrid area of the screen.

Reference level: Sets the value of the guide in rectangular format. Range: -1000dB to 1000dB. In
polar coordinates and Smith's circle chart formats, and logarithmic scale type, the reference level
does not apply.

Reference position: Sets the position of the guide in Rectangular coordinate format. Zero is thebottom line and 10 is the top line. The default position is 5 (middle of the screen). Reference positions
do not apply in polar coordinates, Smith chart formats and logarithmic scale type.

6.8.2 Scaling coupling
When “Scale Coupling” is enabled, tracks of the same format will have the same “Scale”, “Reference
Level”, and “Reference Position”. You can choose to couple the scales for traces in the same window,
for all traces in all Windows, or uncouple them.
Operating steps:
Press Scale, use the knob or arrow keys to focus on the Scale → Scale Coupling parameter item.
Press ENTER or Knob to enter the editing state, select Off / Window / All, then move the cursor to76

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual
the specified position by up and down arrow keys or Knob, press ENTER or Knob to select the current
optionNote: Traces of the same format have the same scale, reference level, and reference position.

Coupling Method:
Close: No coupling. Each trace is scaled individually. This is the default setting.
Window: All traces of the same format in each selected window share the same scale settings
All: Coupled between all selected windows, all traces of the same format in all selected windows
share the same scale settings.
⚫

When window or full coupling is enabled, the scale settings for the working trace will be
adopted by other coupling traces of the same format⚫

If traces of a different format exist, all traces of that format will be set as the least numbered
trace in that format⚫

Once enabled, the scale settings for all coupling traces of the same format can be changed
with any coupling trace in the working state

Selected Windows:
Available when selecting a window or all methods. The selected window participates in scaling
coupling. By default, all windows are selected. Cancel the check box to disable zoom coupling for thiswindow.
About “Auto Scaling” and “Scaling Coupling”:
Automatic scaling using the coupling method affects the work trace in the work window. All traces
coupled to this trace will be set with the new scale of the working trace. This will cause some traces
to not appear on the screen.
Full automatic scaling using the coupled method⚫

Close: All traces in the working window are automatically scaled separately.

⚫

Window: All traces in each selected window are automatically scaled to conform to a common
set of scaling factors.

⚫

All: All traces in all selected Windows are automatically scaled to conform to a common set of
scaling factors.

www.siglent.com

77

SNA6000A User Manual

6.8.3 Electrical delay
Electrical delay is a mathematical function that simulates the variable length of a lossless transmission
line. Linear phase shifts through the device can be compensated using the electrical delay function.
Use this feature to determine only the linear phase deviation of the device. Electrical delay can be set
separately for each measuring trace.
Operating steps:
Press Scale, use the knob or arrow key to bring focus to the Electrical Delay parameter item. Press
ENTER or Knob to enter the editing state. After the editing is completed, move the cursor to thespecified position by up and down direction keys or Knob. Press ENTER or Knob to select the current
option.

Delay time: Specifies the value of the delay added or removed, expressed in time or distance. This
compensates for the linear phase shift through the device. Electrical delay can be set separately foreach measuring trace.
Speed coefficient: Specify the velocity factor applied to the device media inserted after measurement
calibration. The value is 0.66 for polyethylene insulated cables and 0.7 for PTFE insulators.1
corresponds to the speed of light in a vacuum.
Distance unit: Select meters, inches, or feet. When you change this value, the step size does notchange automatically.

6.8.4 Amplitude offset and amplitude slope
The “amplitude offset” allows the amplitude (rather than phase) data to be offset by a fixed or slope
value in Db. The amplitude offset setting affects only the work trace. If the display format is “Linear
Amplitude” or “Real Number” (unitless), the dB is converted and the correct offset is implemented.
Operating steps:
Press Scale, use the knob or arrow keys to bring focus to the Constants → Mag Offset / Mag Slopeparameter item.
Press ENTER or Knob to enter the editing state. After the editing is completed, move the cursor to
the specified position by up and down direction keys or Knob. Press ENTER or Knob to select thecurrent option.

Amplitude deviation: Offset the entire data trace at the specified value.

78

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual
Margin slope: Offset the data trace by some value that changes with frequency. The offset slope
starts at 0 Hz.

6.8.5 Phase deviation
Phase offset mathematically adjusts the phase measurement to a specified degree (up to 360°). Thisfeature can be used in the following ways:⚫

Improved display of phase measurements. This is the same way as changing the reference levelin the amplitude measurement. Change the phase response to the center or align the responseon the screen.

⚫

Simulate Projection phase shift in measurements. For example, if you know that you need to add
a cable and that the length of the cable will add a certain phase shift to the measurement, you
can use a phase shift to increase the length and simulate the entire device measurement.

Key operation:
Press Scale, use the knob or arrow keys to bring focus to the Constants → Phase Offset parameter
item. Press ENTER or Knob to enter the editing state. After the editing is completed, move the cursor
to the specified position by up and down direction keys or Knob. Press ENTER or Knob to select thecurrent option.

6.8.6 Divisions
Sets the number of divisions on the Y axis. An even number from 4 to 30 must be used. Once set, it
is commonly applied to all the traces displayed in the linear scale type on the Y axis within thatwindow.
Operating steps:
Press Scale, use the knob or arrow keys to focus on the Advanced → Divisions parameter item.
Press ENTER or Knob to enter the editing state. Set the value of the Y-axis divisions in the Cartesian
coordinate format. After the editing is completed, move the cursor to the specified position by up anddown direction keys or Knob. Press ENTER or Knob to select the current option. Range: even numbers
from 4 to 30. Divisions do not apply in polar coordinates, Smith chart formats and logarithmic scale
type.

www.siglent.com

79

SNA6000A User Manual

6.8.7 Scale typeThe scale types include linear scale and logarithmic scale, which are expressed as the scale
distribution of the Y axis in the coordinate system. In a logarithmic scale type, the upper and lower
limits of the Y-axis determine how the data trace is displayed on the VNA screen. The scale type canbe set separately for each measuring trace.
Operating steps:
Press Scale, use the knob or arrow keys to focus on the Advanced → Scale Type parameter item.
Press ENTER or Knob to enter the editing state. After the editing is completed, move the cursor to
the specified position by up and down direction keys or Knob. Press ENTER or Knob to select thecurrent option.
Note: The logarithmic scale type can only be selected when the display format is linear magnitude
scheme, real number format or imaginary number format. Other formats are linear scale type.

Scale type:●Linear Scale Type●Log Scale TypeLinear: Y-axis scale linear distribution. The display mode can be set by setting scale, reference leveland position.
Log: The Y-axis scale is logarithmic. The display range can be set by setting the maximum andminimum values of the Y axis.
Max Value: Set the upper limit of the Y-axis in the logarithmic scale type.
Min Value: Set the lower limit of the Y-axis in the logarithmic scale type.

6.9 Avg BW
6.9.1 Overview
The dynamic range is the finite difference between the maximum input power level and the minimum
measurement power level (noise floor) of the analyzer. In evaluating a characteristic accompanied bya large change in the amplitude (the start and stop band of a filter for example), it is important toincrease the dynamic range. The noise floor can be reduced by narrowing the IF bandwidth or turning
on Sweep Averaging.

80

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual
For minimizing very low noise, Averaging is more effective than reducing IF bandwidth. Generally,
Averaging takes slightly longer than IF bandwidth reduction to lower noise, especially if many averages
are required. Also, changing the IF bandwidth after calibration results in uncertain accuracy.

6.9.2 Averaging
Averaging is a feature that the VNA averaging on each data point before stepping to the next data
point. You determine the number of measurements by setting the averaging factor. The higher the
averaging factor, the greater the amount of noise reduction.
Averaging setting:Press the “Avg BW” key, then enter the Averaging and Bandwidth menu.

A.

Averaging Enable.

B.

Sweep Averaging factor. (an integer
between 1 and 999)

C. Averaging Restart. Restart the
Sweep Averaging from 1.

Figure 6-7 Avg BW menu

6.9.3 IF Bandwidth
The received signal of VNA is converted from its source frequency to a lower intermediate frequency(IF). Reducing the IF receiver bandwidth reduces the effect of random noise on a measurement.
Each tenfold reduction in IF bandwidth lowers the noise floor by 10 dB. However, narrower IF
bandwidths cause longer sweep times.
IF Bandwidth setting:
1.

Using the Softkey for setting: Press the “Avg BW” key, Press “Avg BW” > Averaging > IF
Bandwidth > Enter the IF Bandwidth value.

www.siglent.com

81

SNA6000A User Manual

Figure 6-8 Set the IF from the menu bar

2.

Using a mouse for setting: Click the “BW=xx” icon on the menu bar and select IF Bandwidth.

Figure 6-9 Set the IF from the status bar

82

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual

6.9.4 Smoothing
Trace smoothing averages several adjacent data points to smooth the displayed trace. The numberof adjacent data points that get averaged together is also known as the smoothing aperture. You canspecify the aperture as either the number of data points or the percentage of the x-axis span.
Trace Smoothing reduces the peak-to-peak noise values on broadband measured data. It smooths
trace noise and does not increase measurement time significantly.

Smoothing setting:
Using the Softkey for setting: Press the “Avg BW” key, “Avg BW” > Smoothing then enter the
Smoothing menu.

A.

Smooth On|Off When is On, applies smoothing
to the displayed trace.

B.

Percent of Smooth: Specify the percent of theswept stimulus span to smooth. For example,
for a trace that contains 100 data points, and asmoothing percent of span = 11%, then thenumber of data points that are averaged is 11.

C. Smooth Points: Specify the number of adjacentdata points to average.
Figure 6-10 Smoothing menu

Tips:
⚫

Start with a high number of display points and reduce until you are confident that the trace is not
giving misleading results.

⚫

Do not use smoothing for high-resonance devices, or devices with wide trace variations.

⚫

It may Smoothing is set independently for each trace.

6.10 Preset instructions
Invokes preset Settings to restore system Settings to the specified just started state.

www.siglent.com

83

SNA6000A User Manual
Operating instructions:⚫

Preset types are available through Preset → Preset Option, Select “Default”, “Last”, or “User”.

⚫

Press the Preset key, and the device invokes either default Settings or user Settings.

Table 6-1 Some default setting values
Take SNA5084A for example:
Parameter nameParameter value
RF Power

RF stateON

RF level

0 dBm

Signal output port

Port 1

Port couplingON
Frequency

Frequency range

100 kHz-8.5 GHz

Frequency step size

42.4995MHz

Frequency points

201
Sweeping

Sweeping points

201

Sweeping typeLinear frequency

Sweeping time delay

0s

Sweeping mode

automatic
Trigger

Trigger mode

continuous

Trigger source

internal
Measurement

S parameter

S11

Display format
Data display format

Log Mag
Scale

Scale

10 dB

Reference level

0 dB

84

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manualreference position

5

Scale coupling

OFF

Delay time

0s

Delay distance0m

Distance unit

meter

Speed coefficient

1

System impedance

50 Ω

Phase deviation

0°

Amplitude deviation

0 dB
Average

Average stateOFF

Smooth stateOFF
Calibration

Calibration state

www.siglent.com

Unloaded calibration data

85

SNA6000A User Manual

7 Measurement Calibration
7.1 Overview
Usually, DUTs can't be measured directly and accurately due to cabling, adapters, probes, and more.
Calibration, compensation, and fixture simulation are introduced to help achieve higher accuracy.
These functions meet different measurement requirements, but they all can be expressed as a matrix
multiplication of the scattering parameter matrix and a specific compensation matrix. The order of thematrix multiplication has a large influence on the result. So it's important to understand the order ofapplying these functions and to design a suitable physical connection to the DUT and expected
measurement network.
Internal source power calibration and receiver calibration are applied before the scattering parameter
calculation, and the S parameter calibration is applied to the calculation results. This provides thehighest measurement accuracy at the calibration reference plane.
From the reference plane, the order of applying functions is as follow:

Figure 7-1 The order of applying functions

At first, adapter removal/ insertion, port extension, 2-port de-embedding are applied to remove theneedless networks in the physical connections of the DUT and move the measurement plane to the
DUT. Then, Port match, N-port embedding/ de-embedding, port impedance conversion are used toembed or de-embed expected virtual networks. If balance scattering parameters are measured,balance conversion, differential port match, differential port impedance conversion, common port
impedance conversion can be helpful if needed.

86www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual

7.2 Calibration typeThe following table is a comparison of some common S-parameter calibration types:
Table 7-1 S-parameter calibration types
Calibration typeprecision

Allow pass-through methods

TRL

Very highAll, except the unknown direct

SOLT

high

All

Enhanced ResponsehighDefined through or flush through (zero-length
through)

Port 1 (reflection)

high

Not Applicablelow

Not Applicablelow

Known through or flush through (zero-length
through)

Open Circuit Response/
Short Circuit Response
Direct Response

The following are the actual S-parameter calibration types used by this vector network analyzer.
Table 7-2 The vector network analyzer S parameter calibration types
Port number

Port 1

Calibration type

Calibration item

Response (Open)

Open, Load (optional)

Response (Short)

Short, Load (optional)

OSL

Open, Short, Load

Response (Thru) 1 → 2

Thru, Isolation (optional)

Response (Thru) 2 → 1

Thru, Isolation (optional)

Enhanced Response (Thru) 1 → 2Port 2

Enhanced Response (Thru) 2 → 1

Port1:Open, Short, Load
Thru, Isolation (optional)
Port2:Open, Short, Load
Thru, Isolation (optional)
Port1: Open, Short, Load

SOLT

Port2: Open, Short, Load
Thru, Isolation (optional)

SOLR

www.siglent.com

Port1: Open, Short, Load
Port2: Open, Short, Load

87

SNA6000A User Manual
Unknown Thru, Isolation (optional)
Port1: Reflect (Open or Short)
TRL

Port2: Reflect (Open or Short)
Thru, LineTRL:
Application: Used to precisely calibrate any pair of ports when no calibration kits are readily Available.
Note: Difference matching calibration may be required (Delta Match Cal)
Overall accuracy: Very highCalibration kits required: Straight, reflection, line, or similar combination
Corrected system error:⚫

Directivity⚫

Source match⚫

Isolation⚫

Load match⚫

Frequency response⚫

Frequency responsetransmission tracking

reflection tracking

SOLT :
Application: Used to accurately calibrate any number of ports
Overall accuracy: High
Required calibration kits: short circuit, open circuit, load, through) or ECAL electronic calibration partsmodule⚫

Directivity⚫

Source match⚫

Isolation⚫

Load match⚫

Frequency response⚫

Frequency responsetransmission tracking

reflection tracking

Enhanced Response:
Application: Calibrate two ports when only one direction (forward or reverse) is needed formeasurement. Because no secondary sweep is required, the measurement is faster.
⚫

The reflection calibration element (open, short circuit, or load) is connected to the source port tobe calibrated.

88www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual⚫

The defined through-through or flush through-through calibrator kits are connected between portpairs.

⚫

The mechanical calibration kit is much faster than the SOLT. You can also use ECAL.

To select an enhanced response, do the following:
Keys operation: Press Cal, using the knob or arrow keys, to focus on the Cal → Basic Cal parameter
item. Select port1 & port2 from the interface menu, Select Enhanced Response 1 → 2 or Enhanced
Response 2 → 1 in the Cal Type, Press ENTER or the knob to select the current option.
Overall accuracy: High
Required calibration kits: Short circuit, open circuit, load, defined through or flush throughCorrected system error:⚫

Directivity (Source port)⚫

Isolation⚫

Frequency response transmission tracking (receiver port)⚫

Source match (source port)⚫

Load matching (receiver port) is used only to generate transmission trace items⚫

Frequency response reflection tracking (source port)

One port (reflection):
Application: Used to accurately calibrate any test port suitable for reflection measurement only
Overall accuracy: High
Required calibration kits: Short circuit, open circuit, and load or ECAL module
Corrected system error:⚫

Directivity⚫

Frequency response reflection tracking⚫

Source match

Open circuit response / short circuit response:
Application: Quick calibration of any test port suitable for reflection measurement only

www.siglent.com

89

SNA6000A User Manual
Overall accuracy: Low
Calibration kits required: Open circuit or short circuit.
Corrected system error:⚫

Frequency response reflection tracking

Direct / Transport Tracking (isolation optional):
Application: Quick calibration of any pair of test ports suitable for transmission measurements only.
Isolation calibration is generally not recommended.
Overall accuracy: Low
Required calibration kit: Through
Isolation: Each load corresponds to a vector network analyzer test port.
Corrected system error:⚫

Isolation⚫

Frequency response transmission tracking

Power calibration types: Transmitter calibration (internal source power calibration) and receivercalibration.

7.3 Checking Calibration Status
7.3.1 Execution Status of Error Correction for Each Channel
User can check the execution status of error correction for each channel with the error correction status.
The error correction status is indicated in the channel status bar in the lower part of the window by thesymbols in the below table.
SymbolExecution Status of Error Correction

Accuracy

No CorError correction: Off (No Correction)

LowestC N-Port

Error correction: On (Full N Port Correction)

HighestC* N-Port

Error correction: On (Interpolation is being executed)

Uncertain

CΔ N-Port

Error correction: On (Stimulus settings change)

Uncertain

90

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual
No Cor
It indicates there is no Correction. The following will cause the VNA to turn Error Correction OFF forthe channel:⚫

Decrease the start frequency.

⚫

Increase the stop frequency.

⚫

Increase number of points⚫

Change sweep type.

C N-Port
Full N Port correction, where N is the number of fully calibrated ports. This correction is applied to S
Parameters.

C* N-Port"C* " appears in the status bar when a measurement is being interpolated. Interpolation occurs when
you change any of the following settings:⚫

Start frequency increased⚫

Stop frequency decreased⚫

Number of points

Note: Decreasing the start frequency, or increasing the stop frequency will always turn correctionOFF.

CΔ N-Port"CΔ" appears in the status bar when one or more of the following stimulus settings change. The
resulting measurement accuracy depends on which parameter has changed and how much it haschanged. For optimum accuracy, recalibrate using the new settings.
⚫

Sweep time⚫

IF Bandwidth⚫

Port powerwww.siglent.com

91

SNA6000A User Manual

7.3.2 Execution Status of Error Correction for Each Trace
User can check the status of the error correction actually executed for each trace with the trace
status area.
For a trace for which error correction is executed, the applied calibration type is indicated in the trace
status area by the symbols in the table below.
SymbolCalibration type

RO

Open response calibration

RS

Short response calibration

RT

Thru response calibration

ER

Enhanced response calibration

F1

1-port calibration

F2

Full 2-port calibration/2-port TRL calibration

F3

Full 3-port calibration/3-port TRL calibration

F4

Full 4-port calibration/4-port TRL calibration

Note: If none of the symbols described above is displayed, error correction is not executed for the
trace.

7.3.3 Acquisition Status of Calibration Coefficient for Each Channel
User can check the acquisition status of the calibration coefficient for each channel with thecalibration property.
The calibration property displays the acquisition status of the calibration coefficient between test ports
for each channel in matrix format. The following figure shows an example of when the calibration
coefficients have been acquired for the full 2-port calibration between test ports 1 and 2, the response
calibration for test port 3, and the response calibration (THRU) between test ports 4 and 3.

92

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual

F : Full Port Calibration
R : Response Calibration-- : Nothing

7.3.4 Procedure to turn on/off calibration property display
There are two methods to turn on/off the display of calibration property.
Method 1: Click the channel error correction execution status symbol in the channel status bar toopen and close, as shown in the left figure below.
Method 2: Press "Cal” on the front panel > Cal > Correction, as shown in the right figure below.

www.siglent.com

93

SNA6000A User Manual

7.4 Basic Cal
S parameter user calibration can be started after selecting the required S parameter calibration typein the calibration wizard and setting the corresponding parameters.
Operating instructions:
Press the Cal key, use the knob or the arrow key to make the focus fall on Basic Cal, and press
Enter to enter the setting interface of the calibration kit:

94

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual

Figure 7-2 Calibration wizard interface

Select the number of ports to be calibrated from the port menu in the calibration wizard interface, andselect the corresponding calibration kit model in the Cal Kit pull-down option. Select the genderproperties of the calibration connector from the DUT Connector drop-down option, and select thecorresponding calibration method from the Cal Type drop-down option, as shown in the figure below:

Figure 7-3 Calibration wizard interface

After the calibration is set, a specific calibration item interface will appear as shown in the figure below.
Here, taking the two-port SOLT calibration method as an example, it includes several calibration items:
OPEN, SHORT, LOAD, THRU, ISOLATION, among which the ISOLATION calibration item may not becalibrated. There is no sequence relation between these calibration terms. Simply select thecorresponding calibration kit and click the corresponding calibration item menu on the interface.
After completion of the corresponding calibration item, the percentage of calibration progress will be

www.siglent.com

95

SNA6000A User Manual
displayed in the lower-left corner of the interface. When all the calibration steps are completed, thecalibration progress bar will show 100%. Click Finish to exit the calibration interface, calibration
results are automatically loaded in the current screen.

Figure 7-4 Calibration wizard interface

To Save the current calibration data for future use, press the Save Recall button and use the knob orarrow keys to bring the focus to the Save State menu bar. Select State+Cal Data from the Save Typedrop-down option, click Save State As and enter the file name, and click OK to Save the current
calibration Data and the current setting State.

Figure 7-5 Calibration wizard interface

7.4.1 Open Response Calibration
When a single port is used for open-circuit response calibration, the reflection tracking error in the96

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manualerror model of the test device can be calculated by only connecting the OPEN calibration element to
the test port. If the LOAD calibration element is used for isolation calibration at the same time, thedirectional error can be calculated.

Figure 7-6 Schematic diagram

Operating steps:
1.

Preset vector network analyzer.

2.

Set internal source output power, IF bandwidth, sweep points, test frequency band and otherparameters.

3.

Select Cal → Basic Cal to enter the Settings screen.

4.

Select only Port1 or Port2, select the required calibration kit in the Cal Kit, select the Type ofcalibration element connector, Female or Male, in the DUT Connector, select Response(Open)in the Cal Type, and click Next to proceed to the next step.

5.

Connect the OPEN calibration element to the test port according to the interface prompts, click
Open for calibration, and click Finish to exit the calibration interface after calibration, complete
the calibration, and save the calibration data.

7.4.2 Short circuit response calibration
Like the open-circuit response calibration, the single-port short-circuit response is connected to theport with the SHORT calibration element, and the reflection tracking error can be calculated. If the
LOAD calibration element is used for isolation calibration at the same time, the directional error canalso be calculated.
www.siglent.com

97

SNA6000A User Manual

Operating steps:
1.

Preset Vector network analyzer.

2.

Set internal source output power, IF bandwidth, sweep points, test frequency band and otherparameters.

3.

Select Cal → Basic Cal to enter the setting interface.

4.

Select only Port1 or Port2, select the required calibration kit in the Cal Kit, select the Type of
connector, Female or Male, in the DUT Connector, select Response(Short) in the Cal Type,and click Next to proceed to the next step.

5.

Connect the Short calibration element to the test port according to the interface prompts, click
Short for calibration, and click Finish to exit the calibration interface, complete the calibration,and save the calibration data.

7.4.3 Full 1 port OSL calibration
All 1-port OSL calibration connects the OPEN, SHORT, and LOAD calibration elements to the test
ports in turn to calculate the reflection tracking error, directional error, and source matching error in
the error model of the test device.

Figure 7-7 Schematic diagram

Operating steps:
1.

Preset Vector network analyzer.

2.

Set internal source output power, IF bandwidth, sweep points, test frequency band, and otherparameters.

98

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual3.

Select Cal → Basic Cal to enter the setting interface.

4.

Select only Port1 or Port2, select the desired calibration kit in the Cal Kit, select the Type ofcalibration connector, Female or Male, in the DUT Connector, select OSL (Open, Short, Load)in the Cal Type, and click Next to proceed to the next step.
⚫

Connect the OPEN calibration element to the test port according to the interface prompts.

⚫

Click Open for calibration⚫

Then connect the SHORT calibration element to the test port, click Short for Calibration.

⚫

Finally, connect the LOAD calibration element to the test port, click the Load for Calibration.

⚫

After the calibration, click Finish to exit the calibration interface, complete the calibration,and save the calibration data.

7.4.4 Transmission response calibration (two ports)
Two-port transmission response calibration is to connect the THRU calibration kit between two ports
to calculate the transmission tracking error in the test device error model. If the LOAD calibration kit isused for isolation calibration at the same time, isolation error (crosstalk error) can also be calculated.

Figure 7-8 Schematic diagram

Operating steps:
1.

Preset Vector network analyzer.

2.

Set internal source output power, IF bandwidth, sweep points, test frequency band, and otherparameters.

3.

Select Cal → Basic Cal to enter the setting interface.

4.

Select both Port1 and Port2, select the desired calibration kit in the Cal Kit, select the Type ofwww.siglent.com

99

SNA6000A User Manual
calibration connector, Female or Male, in the DUT Connector, Select Response (Thru) 1 → 2
or Response(Thru) 2 → 1 in the Cal Type (the difference is to test S21 or S12), and click Next
to proceed to the next step.
5.

Connect the Thru calibration element between the test ports according to the interface prompts,
click Thru for calibration, and click Finish to exit the calibration interface, complete thecalibration, and save the calibration data.

7.4.5 Enhanced response calibration (two ports)
Two-port enhanced response calibration connects the Thru calibration element between two ports, andonly connects the Open, Short, and Load on one port for calibration, or connects the LOAD element toboth ports for isolation calibration.

Operating steps:
1.

Preset Vector network analyzer.

2.

Set internal source output power, IF bandwidth, sweep points, test frequency band, and otherparameters.

3.

Select Cal → Basic Cal to enter the setting interface.

4.

Select both Port 1 and Port 2, select the desired calibration kit in the Cal Kit, select the type ofcalibration connector, Female or Male, in the DUT Connector, Select Enhanced Response 1→ 2 or Enhanced Response (Thru) 2 → 1 in the Cal Type (the difference is that S21 or S12 istested during THRU calibration), and click Next to proceed to the next step.

5.

According to the interface prompts, connect Open, Short, and Load on a test port to complete
the calibration successively, and then connect the THRU calibration kit between the two ports toperform the Thru calibration. After the calibration is completed, click Finish to exit the calibrationinterface, complete the calibration and save the calibration data.

7.4.6 SOLT calibration (two ports)
Two-port SOLT calibration connects the Open, Short, and Load calibration elements to each test port
in turn and the THRU calibration kit between the two test ports. All 12 error parameters of the two ports
can be calculated, including 6 forward and 6 reverse errors, including directional, source matching,reflection tracking, transmission tracking, isolation (crosstalk), and load matching errors. It is also
possible to connect the LOAD element to both ports for isolation calibration.
100

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual

Figure 7-9 Error model diagram

Operating steps:
1.

Preset vector network analyzer.

2.

Set internal source output power, IF bandwidth, sweep points, test frequency band, and otherparameters.

3.

Select Cal → Basic Cal to enter the Settings screen.

4.

Select both Port 1 and Port 2, select the desired calibration kit in the Cal Kit, select the type ofcalibration connector, Female or Male, in the DUT Connector, select SOLT in the Cal Type, andclick Next to proceed to the next step.

5.

According to the interface prompts, connect the Open, Short, and Load calibration elements toPort 1 successively, and click the corresponding Open, Short, and Load items successively tocomplete the Port 1 calibration.

6.

According to the interface prompts, connect the Open, Short, and Load calibration elements to
Port2 successively, and click the corresponding Open, Short, and Load items successively tocomplete the Port 2 calibration.

7.

According to the interface prompts, connect the THRU calibration kit between the two ports toperform the Thru calibration.

8.

After the calibration, click Finish to exit the calibration interface, complete the calibration, andsave the calibration data.

www.siglent.com

101

SNA6000A User Manual

7.4.7 SOLR unknown through calibration (two ports)
In contrast to the two-port SOLT calibration, the error term in the test unit can be calculated without
knowing the S-parameter of the THRU straight-through calibration. The calibration method is similar
to that of SOLT in that it is possible to connect the LOAD to both ports for isolated calibration.

Operating steps:
1.

Preset vector network analyzer.

2.

Set internal source output power, IF bandwidth, sweep points, test frequency band, and otherparameters.

3.

Select Cal → Basic Cal to enter the Settings screen.

4.

Select both Port 1 and Port 2, select the desired calibration kit in the Cal Kit, select the Type ofcalibration Connector, Female or Male, in the DUT Connector, select SOLR in the Cal Type,and click Next to proceed to the next step.

5.

According to the interface prompts, connect the Open, Short, and Load calibration elements toPort 1 successively, and click the corresponding Open, Short, and Load items successively tocomplete the Port 1 calibration.

6.

According to the interface prompts, connect the Open, Short, and Load calibration elements toPort 2 successively, and click the corresponding Open, Short, and Load items successively tocomplete the Port 2 calibration.

7.

Connect the THRU calibration kit between the two ports according to the interface prompts. The
parameters of the THRU do not have to be known. Carry out unknown through Thru calibration.

8.

After the calibration, click Finish to exit the calibration interface, complete the calibration, andsave the calibration data.

7.4.8 TRL Direct Reflection Transmission Line Calibration (Two Ports)
The two-port TRL calibration method does not need to know the index parameters of the calibration
kit, and all the error items in the error model of the test device can be figured out through three
simple connection methods. TRL calibration scheme will use the THRU straight through calibration
element, reflection calibration kit (Open or Short), and a small section of transmission line.
Operating steps:
1.
102

Preset vector network analyzer.
www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual2.

Set internal source output power, IF bandwidth, sweep points, test frequency band, and otherparameters.

3.

Select Cal → Basic Cal to enter the Settings screen.

4.

Select both Port 1 and Port 2, select the desired calibration kit in the Cal Kit, select the Type ofcalibration kit Connector, Female or Male, in the DUT Connector, select TRL in the Cal Type,and click Next to proceed to the next step.

5.

According to the interface prompts, connect the THRU calibration kit, Reflect(Open or Short)calibration element, and Line on a Port 1 in turn, and click the corresponding Thru, Reflect, andLine items in turn to complete the Port 1 calibration.

6.

According to the interface prompts, connect the THRU calibration element, Reflect(Open or
Short) calibration element, and transmission line on a Port 2 in turn, and click the corresponding
Thru, Reflect, and Line items to complete the Port 2 calibration.

7.

After the calibration, click Finish to exit the calibration interface, complete the calibration, andsave the calibration data.

7.4.9

Partial Overwrite calibration

When the ports are calibrated, some error items in the error model may be not acceptable. For
unacceptable error items, the partial overwrite calibration chooses suitable calibration items tocalibrate the ports again. Taking the two-port SOLT calibration as an example, the following describes
the partial overwrite calibration for achieving full two-port open calibration after completing full twoport SOLT calibration.
Operating steps:
1.

Select Cal → Basic Cal to enter the Settings screen.

2.

Select both Port 1 and Port 2, select the desired calibration kit in the Cal Kit, select the typeof calibration connector, Female or Male, in the DUT Connector, select SOLT in the Cal
Type, and click Next to proceed to the next step.

3.

According to the interface prompts, connect the Open calibration element to Port 1, and click
the corresponding Open item to complete the Port 1 open calibration.

4.

According to the interface prompts, connect the Open calibration element to Port 2, and click
the corresponding Open item to complete the Port 2 open calibration.

5.

Click Overwrite to finish partial overwrite calibration.

Notes
1.

Uncalibrated ports can’t be calibrated directly using partial overwrite calibration.

2.

Partial overwrite calibration requires that sweep points, IF bandwidth, and other parameters
are the same as the values set by the previous calibration method.

www.siglent.com

103

SNA6000A User Manual

7.5 Cal Kit management
7.5.1 Overview
For most applications, the default calibration kit models provide sufficient accuracy for yourcalibration. However, several situations may exist that would require you to create a custom
calibration kit:⚫

Using a connector interface different from those used in the predefined calibration kit models.

⚫

Using standards (or combinations of standards) that are different from the predefined calibration
kits. For example, using three offset SHORTs instead of an OPEN, SHORT, and LOAD to
perform a 1-port calibration.

⚫

Improving the accuracy of the models for predefined kits. When the model describes the actual
performance of the standard, the calibration is more accurate. For example, A 7 mm LOAD isdetermined to be 50.4 Ω instead of 50.0 Ω.

⚫

Modifying the THRU definition when performing a calibration for a non-insertable device.

⚫

Performing a TRL calibration.

Operation instructions:
Press “Cal” on the front panel, Cal > Cal >Cal Kit to enter the Manage Cal Kits page. You can edit,
import, and create or delete calibration kits.

104

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual

Figure 7-10 Manage Cal Kits

A.

Edit the Existing Cal Kit.

B.

Import the customized Cal Kit.

C. Save the existing Cal kits and change the file name.
D. Create a new custom Cal Kit.
E.

Select the Cal Kit.

F.

Save the current Cal kits (both factory and custom).

G. Recall the Cal Kits.
H. Restore the default factory Cal kits.

7.5.2 Connector Tab
At the bottom of each Tab, 'OK' is used to save the edited file, and 'Cancel' is used to close thecalibration suite edit session and the file will not be saved. “Help” is used to view the Helpwww.siglent.com

105

SNA6000A User Manual
documents.

Figure 7-11 The Connectors Tab interface

A. Connector Family: Click the down arrow to select the connector family associated with the Cal
Kit.
B. Add: Starts the Add Connector dialog box which allows you to add a new connector type to thecalibration kit.
C. Select: The selected connector family.
D. Frequency Range: Define the lowest and the highest frequency at which the standard is used
for calibration.
E.

Gender: Gendered or GenderlessF.

Impedance: Specify the impedance of the standard.

106

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual
G. Transmission Media: The medium of the connector, COAX or WAVEGUIDE

7.5.3 Standards Tab
Allows you to Add, Edit, or Delete Cal standards in a Cal kit.
1)

In the “Standard” tab, click “Add” to add the Standard sample.

Figure 7-12 add standard interface

2)Standards dialog box help, the following fields apply to ALL standard types.

Figure 7-13 The help dialog of the Standard
www.siglent.com

107

SNA6000A User Manual

A. Identification
Standard ID: Number in list of standards
Label: Type of standard. This usually appears in prompts for standards.
Description: Description of standard.
B. Connector
Indicates the type and gender (Male, Female, None) of the standard.
Thru and Isolation standards have two connectors.
C. Frequency Range
Min: Defines the lowest frequency at which the standard is used for calibration.
Max: Defines the highest frequency at which the standard is used for calibration.
D. Delay Characteristics
Delay: Defines the one-way travel time from the calibration plane to the standard in seconds.
Z0: Defines the impedance of the standard.
Loss: Defines energy loss in Gohms, due to skin effect, along a one-way length of coaxial cable.

3)

Open Standard

C0, C1, C2, C3: Specify the fringing capacitance.

Figure 7-14 Open Characteristics

4)

Short Standard

L0, L1, L2, L3: Specify the residual inductance.

108

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual

Figure 7-15 Short Characteristics

5)

Load Standard

Figure 7-16 load Characteristics

6)

THRU Standard

Figure 7-17 THRU Characteristics

7.5.4 SOLT Tab
Allows you to assign single or multiple standards to SOLT Calibration Classes.
1)

For each Cal Kit Class, select Available Standards from the left list, then click >> to copy thestandard to the Cal Kit

www.siglent.com

109

SNA6000A User Manual
2)

Use Move Up and Move Down to change the ORDER of the standards.

Figure 7-18 SOLT Tab dialog box

7.5.5 TRL Tab
Allows you to assign single or multiple standards to Calibration Classes.
1)

For each Cal Kit Class, select Available Standards from the left list, then click >> to copy thestandard to the Cal kit.

2)

110

Use Move Up and Move Down to change the ORDER of the standards.

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual

Figure 7-19 TRL dialog box

A. TRL THRU
All THRU calibration methods are supported in a TRL Cal EXCEPT Unknown Thru.
⚫

The THRU standard can be either a zero-length or non-zero length. However, a zero-length
THRU is more accurate because it has zero loss and no reflections, by definition.

⚫

The THRU standard cannot be the same electrical length as the LINE standard.

⚫

If the insertion phase and electrical length are well-defined, the THRU standard may be
used to set the reference plane.

⚫

The THRU standard and LINE standard have the same characteristic impedance and are
perfectly matched. They define the reference impedance of the calibration.

⚫

If a THRU standard with the correct connectors is NOT available, an adapter removal cal
can be performed.

B. TRL REFLECT⚫

The REFLECT standard can be anything with a high reflection, as long as it is the same

www.siglent.com

111

SNA6000A User Manual
when connected to one or more VNA ports.
⚫

The REFLECT standard on each port is identical.

⚫

The actual magnitude of the reflection need not be known.

⚫

The phase of the reflection standard must be known within 1/4 wavelength.

⚫

If the magnitude and phase of the reflection standard are well-defined, the standard may be
used to set the reference plane

C. TRL LINEThe LINE and THRU standards establish the reference impedance for the measurement after thecalibration is completed. TRL calibration is limited by the following restrictions of the LINE standard⚫

Must be of the same impedance and propagation constant as the THRU standard.

⚫

The electrical length need only be specified within 1/4 wavelength.

⚫

Cannot be the same length as the THRU standard.

⚫

A TRL Cal with broad frequency coverage requires multiple LINE standards. For example, aspan from 2 GHz to 26 GHz requires two lines standards.

⚫

Must be an appropriate electrical length for the frequency range

D. TRL MATCH
If the LINE standard of appropriate length or loss cannot be fabricated, a MATCH standard may be
used instead of the LINE.
⚫

The MATCH standard is a low-reflection termination connected to both Port 1 and Port 2.

⚫

The MATCH standard may be defined as an infinite length transmission line OR as a 1-port
low reflect termination, such as a load.

⚫

When defined as an infinite length transmission line, both test ports must be terminated by a
MATCH standard at the same time. When defined as a 1-port load standard, the loads aremeasured separately. The loads are assumed to have the same characteristics.

⚫

The impedance of the MATCH standard becomes the reference impedance for themeasurement. For best results, use the same load on both ports. The load may be definedusing the data-based definition, the arbitrary impedance definition, or the fixed load
definition.

112

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User ManualE.

Calibration Reference Z0⚫

System Z0: The system impedance is used as the reference impedance. Choose when thedesired test port impedance differs from the impedance of the LINE standard. Also, choose
when skin effect impedance correction is desired for coax lines.

⚫

Line Z0: The impedance of the line standard is used as the reference impedance or centerof the Smith Chart. Any reflection from the line standard is assumed to be part of thedirectivity error.

F.

Test Port Reference Plane⚫

Thru Standard: The THRU standard definition is used to establish the measurement
reference plane. Select if the THRU standard is zero-length or very short.

⚫

Reflect Standard: The REFLECT standard definition is used to establish the position of themeasurement reference plane. Select if the THRU standard is not appropriate AND thedelay of the REFLECT standard is well defined.

G. Multiline TRL⚫

After selecting the Multiple TRL checkbox, you can click the Setup button to set the TRL
calibration parameter configuration interface.

www.siglent.com

113

SNA6000A User Manual

7.5.6 Create a custom Cal Kit
There are two methods to create a custom Cal Kit:
Method 1: Create custom Cal Kit based on existing Cal kits
1.

Press “Cal” > Cal > Cal Kit > F503ME > Save. Select the existing F503ME Cal Kit then save it toa local file named “F503ME123.xkt”.

114

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual

Figure 7-20 Creating a Custom Cal Kit dialog box

Figure 7-21 Save the Cal Kit

2.

In the Manage Cal Kits dialog box, click “Import” to Import the new calibration “F503ME123.xkt”.

www.siglent.com

115

SNA6000A User Manual

Figure 7-22 Import the new Cal Kit

3.

Select the newly imported calibration, click “Edit” to enter the calibration editing interface, andmodify the calibration name as “F530ME-ABC”.

Figure 7-23 Edit the new import Cal Kit

116

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual
4.

Click the Connectors, Standards, SOLT, and TRL Tabs to modify the corresponding parameters
as you need.

5.

Click “OK” for the changed Cal Kit to take effect.

Method 2：Create a custom Cal Kit directly for new connector types.
1.

Press “Cal” > Cal > Cal Kit > Insert...

2.

Enter the name and description of the custom Cal Kit.

3.

Refer to Method 1, click the Connectors, Standards, SOLT, TRL tab to modify the corresponding
parameters.

4.

Click “OK” to make the created calibration effective.

Figure 7-24 View the newly created Cal Kit

www.siglent.com

117

SNA6000A User Manual

7.6

Power Cal

7.6.1 Internal source power calibration
The vector network analyzer has been calibrated for the output power of the transmitter before it
leaves the factory, but the factory calibration may not guarantee sufficient accuracy in all cases. To
improve the accuracy, the user can conduct an internal source power calibration before performing
any tests.

Figure 7-2 Transmitter power calibration

Before attempting power calibration, power loss compensation at different frequency points can be
set as shown in the figure below. Click “+” successively to add corresponding frequency and loss
values. After setting, click OK to save the data.

118

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual

Figure 7-3 Set the interface

Power calibration operation steps:
1.

Connect the port-under-test to a compatible power meter (Keysight U2000 series, R&S NRP
series, etc.) and probe to ensure normal communication between the vector network analyzer
and the power meter.

2.

Preset vector network analyzer.

3.

Set internal source output power, IF bandwidth, sweep points, test frequency band and otherparameters.

4.

Select Cal → Power Cal to enter the Settings screen.

5.

Select the test channel and select the power output port.

6.

Set parameters such as power offset, capacity limit, reading times, maximum iteration times, etc.

7.

Click Take Cal Sweep to start the power output measurement.

8.

Click OK to complete the calibration and exit the power calibration interface after themeasurement is completed.

7.6.2 Receiver calibration
The vector network analyzer receiver power has been factory calibrated, but the factory calibration
may not guarantee sufficient accuracy in every situation. The user can conduct a receiver powerwww.siglent.com

119

SNA6000A User Manual
calibration before the test to improve the test accuracy. To ensure the calibration accuracy of thereceiver, it is better to calibrate the power of the internal source before the calibration of the receiver.

Figure 7-4 Receiver calibration setting interface

Operating steps:
1.

Preset vector network analyzer.

2.

Set internal source output power, IF bandwidth, sweep points, test frequency band, and otherparameters.

3.

Select Cal → Receiver Cal to enter the Settings screen.

4.

Select the test channel, select the internal source output port, select the receiver port

5.

Connect the two ports using an appropriate specification RF cable.

6.

Set parameters such as power offset.

7.

Calibrate R or Calibrate T or Calibrate Both can be clicked to begin receiver calibration.

8.

Click OK to complete the calibration and exit the receiver calibration interface.

7.7 Port extension
Eliminating the errors of test fixturing can be a difficult task. The port extension function of a vector

120

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual
network analyzer is a good method to eliminate the error of test fixtures. The calibration of S parameters
is usually carried out by the user at the plane where the RF cable is connected to the test fixture,
typically a connector (SMA, N-type, etc.). The actual device to be tested is located in the test fixture.
The device to be tested and the test fixture are generally connected by a microstrip line. As a result,the actual measurement plane of the device to be tested does not coincide with the calibrationreference plane (the connector, as mentioned previously) which will introduce calibration errors.
After the S parameter calibration is performed, the reference plane can be extended to the specified
measurement plane by simply adding the added microstrip line length, speed factor, loss, and otherparameters in the setting interface, to carry out more accurate testing.

Figure 7-5 Port extension setting interface

7.7.1 Manual port extension
1.

Perform the appropriate calibration type (SOLT, etc.) on the associated cabling before entering
Port Extensions.

2.

Select Cal → Port Extension → Port Extension to enter the Settings screen.

3.

Select the port that needs to be extended, the unit of length, and input the velocity coefficient.
The velocity coefficient is different, and the propagation time of electromagnetic waves on thetransmission line is different. Input the length of the extended transmission line and the time will
be calculated automatically.
If the transmission line has loss, the loss of the transmission line can be added, including DC
and AC loss.

www.siglent.com

121

SNA6000A User Manual
The AC loss can be selected as LOSS1 at the single-frequency point or LOSS1 and LOSS2 atthe dual-frequency point.
Among them, the fitting algorithm for two forms of AC loss are:Single-frequency point loss Loss1:
Loss (f) = Loss1 * (f/Freq1) ^ 0.5
Dual-frequency point loss Loss1, Loss2:
Set the low frequency point to LOSS1 and the high frequency point to LOSS2,
Loss (f) = Loss1 * (f/Freq1) ^ n, n = lg [abs(Loss1/Loss2)] / lg (Freq1/Freq2).
4.

Select whether to coupling to the system speed factor. If unchecked, the speed factor is set only
for the specified port, and when checked, for all ports.

5.

Check the Port Extensions ON button and the Port extension will take effect.

Manual port extensions require the user to manually enter the parameters of the extended transmissionline, while automatic port extension does not require prior knowledge of the transmission line
parameters. The calibration plane can be automatically extended to the actual reference plane bysimply performing an open or short circuit calibration on the actual reference plane of the DUT. The
automatic port extension function is not available in the following cases:
1.

The sweep type is set to power sweep.

2.

The frequency offset is set to on.

3.

Waveguide transmission line port extension.

122

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual
Figure 7-6 Automatic port extension setting interface

7.7.2 Automatic port extension
1.

Perform the appropriate calibration type (SOLT, etc.) on the associated cabling before entering
Port Extensions.

2.

Select Cal → Port Extension → Auto Port Extension to enter the Settings screen.

3.

Select the port you want to extend. Refer to practical application scenarios, select Port 1 or Port2, or both ports.

4.

Select the frequency span of the test.
There are three frequency spans to choose:
Current Span: The frequency span of the current interface setting.
Active Marker: The frequency point currently marked, In this case, Loss2 can be ignored when+setting loss, only Loss1 can be set.
User Span: Use the start and end frequencies set by the user.

5.

Set whether the loss should be included or not. Select this box to automatically measure the loss
in the transmission line and apply it to the calibration.

6.

The mismatch adjustment option is only available when the inclusion loss item is selected. The
mismatch increases the ripple on the trace lines of S11 and S22. If the ripple is large, the trace
display of S11 and S22 will be greater than 0 dB, resulting in unstable values when S parameters
are used. Selecting the adjustment mismatch item can increase the loss of the fixture so that thepeak value of the ripple is below 0 dB. Although this will increase the error, it can prevent thenumerical instability of S parameters from appearing when it is used.

7.

Click Next to enter the measurement interface. Before the measurement, make sure that thedevice has been removed from the test fixture. In this way, the open-circuit measurement can be
performed. Of course, the test fixture can also refer to the plane Short circuit to conduct the Shortmeasurement. It can carry out one of the Open or Short measurements or simultaneously carryout the Open and Short measurements. When two measurements are used, the result will be theaverage of the two measurements, and the accuracy will be improvedwww.siglent.com

123

SNA6000A User Manual

Figure 7-7 Automatic port extension calibration interface

7.8 Fixture measurement function
In addition to the port extension function, the vector network analyzer also provides several otherfunctions for test fixtures:
1.

Port match (2-port embedding)

2.

Port impedance conversion

3.

2-port de-embedding

4.

N port embed/ de-embed (port 4/6/8)

5.

Differential port match

6.

Differential port impedance conversion

7.

Common port impedance conversion

7.8.1 Port match
1.

Ensure that the user has completed the S parameter calibration.

2.

Select Cal → Fixtures → Fixture Setup → Port Match to enter the Settings screen.

3.

By selecting the port and the parameter representation form of the matching module, the S2P file
(AKA Touchstone file) of the matching module can be directly exported or the circuit model of thematching module can be used. It supports 9 topologies which are combined by L, R, G, and C. It
is necessary to manually set the parameter values of L, R, G, and C components. Checking the
Enable Port Matching On All Ports tab means that all ports are matched. When the frequency
range in the S2P file of the imported matching module is less than the frequency range set by
the current interface, the system will extrapolate the S2P file by default. In other words, all theuncovered low-frequency parameters are replaced by the first point in the S2P file and all theuncovered high-frequency parameters are replaced by the last point in S2P file making the124

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manualfrequency range of the S2P file the same as the frequency range of the current interface.
4.

Click Close to complete the setting and click Apply Fixtures to ON to take effect.

Figure 7-8 Port match

7.8.2 Port impedance conversion
1.

Ensure that the user has completed the S parameter calibration.

2.

Select Cal → Fixtures → Fixture Setup → Port Z to enter the Settings screen.

3.

Choose the port, the default system port characteristic impedance is 50 Ω, you can fill in therequired resistance values in the R and JX columns, Then the S parameter displayed will be
automatically converted to the S parameter corresponding to the new characteristic impedance.
Checking the Enable Port Z Conversion On All Ports tab means port matching is performedon all ports.

www.siglent.com

125

SNA6000A User Manual
4.

Click Close to complete the setting and click Apply Fixtures to ON to take effect.

Figure 7-9-port impedance conversion

7.8.3 2-port de-embed1.

Ensure that the user has completed the S parameter calibration.

2.

Select Cal → Fixtures → Fixture Setup → 2-Port DeEmbed to enter the Settings screen.

3.

Select the port and select the form of de-embedding to import an S2P File. Click User S2P Fileto import the S parameter of the fixture part that needs to be removed.
Checking the Enable De-Embedding On All Ports tab means that all ports are de-embeddable.
When the frequency range in the S2P file of the imported matching module is smaller than thefrequency range set by the current interface, the system will extrapolate the S2P file by default.
All the low-frequency parameters not covered are replaced by the first point in the S2P file, andall the high-frequency parameters not covered are replaced by the last point in the S2P file,
making the frequency range of the S2P file the same as that of the current interface.

4.

Checking the Reverse Adapter Ports entry represents the part of the reverse connection thatwill need to be de-embedding. By default, the system reverses the imported S2P file.

5.

126

Click Close to complete the setting and click Apply Fixtures to ON to take effect.

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual

Figure 7-10 de-embedding interface

7.8.4 N-port embedding / de-embedding
1.

Ensure that the user has completed the S parameter calibration.

2.

Select Cal → Fixtures → Fixture Setup → N-Port DeEmbed to enter the Settings screen.

3.

Select the topology type.
There are 3 topology types: A (using network 1); B (using network 1 and 3); C (using network 1,
2 and 4)
Select the port of the vector network analyzer in the VNA item, select the Network port
configuration that needs to be embedded or de-embedded in the Network, and select the Embed
operation or De-embed operation under each Network. Finally, load the S2P file corresponding tothe operating network. Checking the Enable 4/ 6/ 8-Port Embed / De-embed On All Ports tabmeans that all ports are matched.
When the frequency range in the S2P file of the imported matching module is less than thefrequency range set by the current interface, the system will extrapolate the S2P file by default.
In other words, all the uncovered low-frequency parameters are replaced by the first point in the

www.siglent.com

127

SNA6000A User Manual
S2P file, and all the uncovered high-frequency parameters are replaced by the last point in the
S2P file, making the frequency range of the S2P file the same as the frequency range of thecurrent interface.
4.

Click Close to complete the setting and click Apply Fixtures to ON to take effect.

Figure 7-11 De-embedding interface

7.8.5 Differential port match
1.

Ensure that the user has completed the S parameter calibration.

2.

Select Cal → Fixtures → Fixture Setup → Differential Port Match to enter the Settings screen.

3.

By selecting the port and the parameter representation form of the matching module, the S2P fileof the matching module can be directly imported or the circuit model of the matching module canbe used.
It is necessary to manually set the parameter values of L, R, G, and C components if the circuit
model is used.
Checking the Enable Differential Port Matching tab means that all ports are matched.
When the frequency range in the S2P file of the imported matching module is less than thefrequency range set by the current interface, the system will extrapolate the S2P file by default.

128

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual
In other words, all the uncovered low-frequency parameters are replaced by the first point in the
S2P file and all the uncovered high-frequency parameters are replaced by the last point in the
S2P file making the frequency range of the S2P file the same as the frequency range of thecurrent interface.
4.

Click Close to complete the setting and click Apply Fixtures to ON to take effect.

Figure 7-12 Differential port match

7.8.6 Differential and common port impedance conversion
The operation of differential port impedance conversion and common port impedance conversion issimilar to that of port impedance conversion, please refer to the instructions of the latter.

7.9 Adapter removal / insertion function
Adapters are often used when the network analyzer is used to test the DUT. The vector network
analyzer provides the function of removing and inserting adapters. Before the function of removing
and inserting adapters is enabled, the vector network analyzer needs to carry out full 2-port
calibration.

www.siglent.com

129

SNA6000A User Manual

Figure 7-13 Adapter removal and insertion functions

7.9.1 Adapter removal
1.

Connect the test cable of the vector network analyzer to the adapter, and configure theparameters of the network analyzer. First, perform the full 2-port calibration.

2.

Select Cal → Adapter Removal to go to the Settings screen and select Remove in the Adapter
tab.

3.

Remove the adaptor from the test cable, Select Cal → Adapter Removal → Calibration toenter the Adapter Removal configuration screen. Select the port connected to the adaptor to be
removed, select the calibration kit type, and select the polarity of the calibration kit. Click Next toconnect the Open, Short and Load calibration elements in turn for full 1 port calibration.

4.

Click Finish to complete the calibration and click Adapter Removal to ON to complete theAdapter Removal operation.

130

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual

Figure 7-14 Adapter removal and insertion function calibration interface

7.9.2 Adapter insertion
1.

Remove any test cables from the ports of the analyzer and perform a full 2-port calibration.

2.

Select Cal → Adapter Removal to go to the Settings screen and select Insert in the Adapter tab.

3.

Connect the adapter on the test cable, select Cal → Adapter Removal → Calibration to enter
the Adapter Removal configuration screen. Select the port connected with the adaptor to beinserted, select the calibration kit model, select the polarity of the calibration kit, and click Next toconnect the Open, Short, and Load calibration elements in turn for full 1 port calibration.

4.

Click Finish to complete the calibration and click Adapter Removal to ON to complete the Adapter
insertion operation.
“Adapter Rotate” is also known as the “equal exchange adapter and equal length adapter”
calibration method. Before the unknown pass-through method was introduced, the switching
adapter method was often used as a faster alternative to the more tedious adapter removal
method.

7.10 Ecal
7.10.1 ECal Overview
ECal is a new automatic calibration technology for vector network analyzers. Every ECal module
contains electronic standards that are automatically switched into position during a measurement
calibration. These electronic standards have been measured at the factory and the data stored within
the memory of the ECal module. The analyzer uses this stored data, along with the measured data,
to calculate the error terms for a measurement calibration. ECal offers the following advantages:⚫

The calibration process is simple. The electronic calibrator only needs to be connected to thewww.siglent.com

131

SNA6000A User Manual
VNA once to complete the test items required by the dual-port calibration, without the need for
multiple calibration connections.
⚫

A shorter time is required for calibration.

⚫

There are fewer uncertain factors in the calibration process, and the probability of electroniccalibration being affected by misoperation is reduced because there is no need for multiple
connection processes.

Use ECal to perform calibration
1.

Connect the USB port on the ECal module with the USB port on the front panel of VNA via a USB
cable. the module indicates “READY”. When you connect the module, the type of module,
frequency range, and connector type are automatically recognized.

2.

Connect a port on the ECal module to the test port to be calibrated.

3.

Press Cal > ECal on the front panel to enter the ECal menu interface.

A.

ECal Config. Select the number of ports to calibrate.
Then select the port number configuration.

B.

Confidence Check. Check the validity of Ecalcalibration.

C. Orientation. Select “Auto” (the default setting) the
VNA automatically senses the model and direction inwhich an ECal module port is connected to the VNA
ports. Select “Manual” to manually set the specified
port.
D. Characterization. View the characterization
information stored in the ECal module
Figure 7-15 ECal menu

7.10.2 ECal Config
Press “Cal” on the front panel , Press Cal > ECal > ECal to enter the menu interface of ECal setting.

132

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual

Figure 7-16 ECal config menuA.

Select the number of ports to calibrate and configure the port number. Using ECal, you can perform
1-Port Reflection calibration, Full 2-Port calibration, Full 3-Port calibration, and Full 4-Portcalibration.

B.

Select the Cal Type

C. When “Orientation” is Auto, click “Next” to enter the automatic alignment directly. When
“Orientation” is Manual, click “Next” to specify the calibration port and go to auto-calibration.

7.10.3 Confidence Check1.

Press “Cal” on the front panel, press Cal > ECal > Confidence Check to enter the menu interfaceof Confidence Check.

www.siglent.com

133

SNA6000A User Manual

Figure 7-17 Confidence Check

2.

Compare the data-trace with the memory trace and verify that the measurement is correct.

3.

The steps to compare when both data and memory traces are displayed are as below:⚫

Press “Math” on the front panel, Press “Math” > Memory > Math > Data + Memory.

⚫

Press “Scale” on the front panel, Press “Scale” > Scale > Auto Scale.

⚫

Determine if the differences between trace lines are acceptable.

7.10.4 Orientation
The ECal module automatically detects the connection between SNA's test ports and ECal module's
ports. You can turn off this function to set ports manually.
Manual port setting procedure for Full 2-Port calibration
1.

Press “Cal” on the front panel, Press “Cal” > ECal > Orientation > Manual.

2.

Specify a test port of the VNA.

3.

Specify an ECal port for the port of the VNA you specified.

134

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual

Figure 7-18 Manual port setting

7.10.5 Characterization
Press “Cal” on the front panel, press “Cal” > Cal > Characterization > Factory to view all the parametersof the stored Characterization in the ECal module.

Figure 7-19 The factory information of Cal Kit
www.siglent.com

135

SNA6000A User ManualA.

The date when the characteristics were measured

B.

The stimulus conditions when the characteristics were measured

C. The information of the Connector type136

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual

8 Data Analysis
8.1 Marker
The marker can display defined measurement data of traces. Each trace can set nine ordinary markers
and one reference marker.

8.1.1 Ordinary marker:
Press the Marker button on the front panel, click Add Marker in the Marker submenu to create amarker, then set the required test frequency. if there are many markers on the trace, click Select toselect the desired marker. After the marker is created, the measurement value of the marker will be
displayed at the top right of the window, and the value format is the same as the format of the trace.
We can click the Delete Marker command under the marker submenu to delete the marker and selectthe marker to delete from the pop-up menu. When a trace is deleted, all markers on the trace will bedeleted. Click the All Off command under the Marker submenu or the Marker Setup submenu todelete all markers on the current trace.

8.1.2 Reference marker:
Press the Marker button on the front panel, click Reference Marker in the Marker submenu, makethe On option selected then the Reference Marker will be created. By default, the Reference Marker
is created at the location of the current ordinary Marker. If there is no ordinary Marker on the current
trace, the Reference Marker will be created at the center of the trace. Reference Markers are denotedby an R. After creating a Reference Marker, set the Reference Marker as value discretization, fixedmarker, and coupling, we can set the data format of Reference Marker’s display value and view theReference Marker’s value in the marker table, but the Reference Marker cannot be set as a difference(delta) marker. Click Reference Marker in the Marker submenu, select the Off option to delete theReference Marker.

8.1.3 Marker setting:Press the Marker button on the front panel, set the current marker in the Marker Setup submenu, we
can make the following settings for the currently selected marker:
1.

Difference (delta) display:www.siglent.com

137

SNA6000A User Manual
The difference display mode is closed by default, to open the difference display mode, click theDelta to select the On option, then the marker’s value will display the difference between theordinary marker and the reference marker, and the marker’s value is marked with "Δ". If a reference
marker has not been added to the trace, the reference marker will be automatically set on the
trace. To display the absolute value of the marker, click the Delta again to select the Off option.
2.

Value discretization:
The value discretization mode is closed by default. Due to the limited number of sampling points
set on the trace, the data of other points except the sampling points are based on the interpolation
value of the sampling point data, which is approximate to the actual data, not the real measured
data. By setting the value discretization of the marker, the value of the marker can only be taken
at the sampling point, which ensures that the marker’s value is from the measurement data andnot interpolated data. To open the value discretization mode, click the Discrete to select the On
option, at this time, the data of the marker is only selected from the sampling points, when thecoordinate value of the marker is not in the sampling point, the marker is automatically moved to
the nearest sampling point. To turn off the value discretization, click the Discrete to select the Off
option.

3.

Fixed marker:
The fixed marker mode is closed by default. Fixed markers have a fixed excitation position (x-axis
coordinate), its response value (Y-axis coordinate) will change according to the trace data update.
To keep the fixed value of the marker unchanged, click the Type command to select the Fixed
option, then the marker’s value will keep the current value unchanged, and the marker does not
move up or down with the trace update. To restore the marker real-time update, click the Typecommand again to select the Normal option.

4.

Data format:
The newly created marker uses the current trace’s data format by default. To change the data
format of the marker, click the Format and select the corresponding data format in the pop-up
menu. The following data formats are available:
Trace Default

Lin Magnitude

Log/Phase

Phase

Lin/Phase

SWR

Re/Im

Delay

R+jx

Real

G+jB

Imaginary

Log Magnitude138

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual

Figure 8-1 Data format interface

5.

Marker coupling:
The newly created marker turns off coupling by default. At this time, the marker is only set on asingle trace, and the markers on different traces do not affect each other. If we need multiple
markers on different traces to share settings, we can use the marker coupling function. Click the
Coupled command, and select the range of the marker coupling in the pop-up menu for coupling
operation. When the marker coupling mode is on, the markers of the same number and X-axis(such as frequency or time) on all traces in the coupling range share the settings, and the marker’s
setting on the current trace will be used by default. If the current marker is not in the coupling
range, the marker with the same number on the trace with the smallest trace number is used.
Note: when the marker coupling mode is on, the marker on the trace within the coupling range
will automatically move to the same X-axis coordinate.

6.

Marker table:
The newly created marker closes the marker table by default. If we need to display all marker
data in the form of a table, we can use the marker table function. Click the Marker Table toselect the On state, a table will appear at the bottom left to display all marker’s values, click theMarker Table again to select the Off option to close the marker table.

www.siglent.com

139

SNA6000A User Manual

8.1.4 Marker Display
Press the Marker button on the front panel, set the display effect for the current cursor in the Marker
Display submenu:●

Show Readout: The system is turned on by default. If this switch is turned off, the cursor reading
will be hidden.

●

Active Trc Only: The system is turned off by default. If this switch is turned on, only the cursor
reading of the current working trace will be displayed.

●

Align: The system is turned on by default. If this switch is turned off, the cursor of different traces
will not be aligned and displayed.

●

X Pos: Set the display position of the cursor reading on the X-axis.

●

Y Pos: Set the display position of the cursor reading on the Y-axis.

●

Decimal Places: By default, the Auto Decimal Places check box is checked. When unchecked,
the decimal places for the stimulus value and response value of the cursor reading can be set.

8.1.5 Marker function
Press the Marker button on the front panel, use the current marker to set the excitation in the Marker
Function submenu. Use the currently selected marker to achieve the following functions:⚫

Marker → Start: Set the current marker position (X coordinate) as the sweeping starting point.

⚫

Marker → Stop: Set the current marker position (X coordinate) as the sweeping ending point.

⚫

Marker → Center: Set the current marker position (X coordinate) as the sweeping center point.
Note: When using this command, the sweeping boundary value far from the current marker will bechanged to reduce the sweeping range, so that the marker position becomes the new sweeping
center point.

⚫

Marker → Span: This function is only available when the current marker is a difference (delta)
marker. Set the sweeping range between the current marker position and the reference marker
position (x coordinate).

⚫

Marker → Ref Level: Set the response value (Y coordinate) of the current marker to the reference
level of the current trace.

⚫

Marker → Delay: Referring to the phase slope of the current marker position, the line length isadjusted to the receiver input, this function helps to smooth the phase trace around the current

140

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual
marker. For the equipment without constant group delay in the measurement frequency span,
another electrical delay adjustment is needed. This function can be used to measure electricallength or deviation from a linear phase. This function requires the measured phase difference, so
it is only suitable for proportional measurements.
⚫

Marker → CW Freq: Set the current marker position (frequency) to continuous wave (CW)
frequency. This function requires the x-axis field of the current marker, otherwise, it is invalid. Afterchanging CW frequency with this command, enable power or CW sweeping to apply the changed
CW frequency setting.

⚫

Marker → SA: If the current mode is SA, the center frequency is set to the current marker value;
If it is not SA mode, then switch to SA mode, set the center frequency to the current marker value,and set span to 10 times of the previous step freq.

8.2 Marker search function
The marker can be used to search the maximum value, minimum value, peak value, and target valueof the trace in the specified search domain. It can also search for multi-peak value, multi-target,
bandwidth filtering, and band-stop filtering.

8.2.1 Search domain
The search domain is the frequency span included in a marker search operation. Each marker has anindependent search domain, and the default is full span, which is the same as the current sweep range.
The X coordinate movement range of the marker is limited in its search domain. The user can set up
to 16 custom search domains. The search domains are independent of each other and allowed tooverlap. The search field can be set for each marker, and multiple markers are allowed to share one
search domain.
To set a custom search domain, press the Search button on the front panel, click the Domain
command in the Search submenu, and click the Add command in the pop-up menu. Then click theDomain command again, click and select the newly created custom search domain in the pop-up menu,
and enter the required values in the Start and Stop text boxes below the domain command. When the
search domain of the current marker is not full span, the indicator "Δ" will appear on the x-axis to
identify the search domain of the current marker. To delete a user-defined search domain, click theDomain command, select the search domain to be deleted in the pop-up menu, then click the Domain
command again, and then click Delete in the pop-up menu. If the search domain of the marker isdeleted, its search domain is automatically set to full span.

www.siglent.com

141

SNA6000A User Manual

8.2.2 Max and min search
Press the Search button on the front panel and click the Max Search command in the Search
submenu to move the current marker to the maximum response value in the search domain. Press the
Search button on the front panel and click the Max Search command in the Search submenu to movethe current marker to the maximum response value in the search domain. Click the Min Searchcommand to move the current marker to the minimum response value in the search domain.

8.2.3 Peak search
Press the Search button on the front panel to search the peak in the Peak submenu. Before
searching for the peak value, the effective peak value to be searched should be defined first. The
validity of the peak value is determined by the search domain, peak polarity, threshold, and deviation:

Peak polarity: According to the polarity, the peaks are divided into two categories: Positive andnegative. The positive peak value refers to situations where the measured value is greater than themeasured value at both ends of a span, and the negative peak value refers to the peak value that themeasured value is less than the measured value at both ends of a span. Click the Peak Polarity
command in the Peak submenu to select the peak polarity. The Both option means that both positive
and negative peaks are regarded as valid peaks for the search.

Threshold: For the positive peak, only the peak whose measured value is greater than the thresholdis considered valid; for the negative peak, only the peak whose measured value is less than thethreshold is considered valid; when the polarity of the peak is set to Both, the threshold is not usedas the basis for judging the validity of the peak. To set the threshold, click the Threshold command in
the Peak submenu to enter the required value.

Deviation: The deviation value of peak value refers to the smaller difference between the measured
value of peak value and the measured value of an adjacent peak with the opposite polarity. Only thepeak value with a deviation greater than the rated value is considered valid. To set the deviation
value, click the Excursion command in the Peak submenu to enter the required value.

After determining the effective peak range and search domain, the peak search can be started. There
are several peak searching modes available:

142

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual⚫

Using the Peak Search command in the Peak submenu, the peak with the largest measured
value among the effective positive peaks or the peak with the smallest measured value among
the effective negative peaks will be included in the search according to the peak polarity setting.
If the current peak polarity is set to Both, the peak with the largest measured value among theeffective positive peaks is searched.

⚫

Use the Peak Right → Search command in the Peak submenu to search the nearest effective
peak from the current marker position to the right.

⚫

Use the Peak Left ← Search command in the Peak submenu to search the nearest effective
peak from the current marker position to the left.

⚫

Use the Next Peak Search command in the Peak submenu to search for the effective positive
peak value next lower than the current marker measurement value or the effective negative peakvalue next higher than the current marker measurement value according to the peak polarity
setting. If the current peak polarity is set to Both, the effective peak next lower than the current
vernier measurement value is searched.

8.2.4 Target search
Press the Search button on the front panel to search the target in the Target submenu. Before
searching the target, set the target value and transition type:
Target value: The target value refers to the response value to search (Y coordinate). If the response
value of a point on the trace is equal to the target value, then the point is the target point to search.
To set the target value, click the Target Value command in the Target submenu to enter the required
value.

Transition type: The target points are divided into two types, positive and negative. The positive
target conversion type means that the measured value on the right side of the target point is greaterthan that on the left side, while the negative target conversion type means that the measured valueon the right side of the target point is less than that on the left side. Click the Transition command in
the Target submenu to select the conversion type to search for. The Both option means that both
positive and negative target conversion types are regarded as valid targets.

After the target value, transition type and search domain are determined, the target search can bestarted. The vector network analyzer has the following target search modes:⚫

Use the Target Search command in the Target submenu to search for the nearest effective

www.siglent.com

143

SNA6000A User Manual
target from the current marker position to the right. When no effective target can be found fromthe right, search from the starting point of the search domain to the right.
⚫

Use the Target Right → Search command in the target submenu to search the nearest valid
target from the current marker position to the right.

⚫

Use the Target Left ← Search command in the Target submenu to search the nearest valid
target from the current marker position to the left.

8.2.5 Multi-peak search
Press the Search button on the front panel to search for multiple peaks in the Multi Peak & Target
submenu. Before searching for multiple peaks, you need to set the threshold, deviation, and peakpolarity in the Peak Threshold, Peak Excursion and Peak Polarity commands in the submenu todefine the peak validity. After setting the above parameters, click the Multi Peak Search command to
search all effective peaks from the starting point of the search domain to the right, and mark thepeaks with a marker. Since there can only be 9 common markers on a single trace, only the first 9
effective peaks can be found when there are many effective peaks.

8.2.6 Multi-target search
Press the Search button on the front panel to search for multiple targets in the Multi Peak & Target
submenu. Before multi-target search, you need to set the target value and conversion type in theTarget Value and Transition submenu to define the target validity. After setting the above parameters,
click the Multi-Target Search command to search all valid targets from the starting point of the searchdomain to the right, and mark the searched targets with a marker. Since there can only be 9 common
markers on a single trace, only the first 9 valid targets can be found when there are many valid targets.

8.2.7 Tracking search
When using the above search function, the marker position is only based on the current sweeping
result, and will not be dynamically updated with the trace update after the search. Tracking mode canbe used to update search results with trace data. Press the Search button on the front panel, click the
Tracking command, and select the search type in the pop-up menu; the search in the tracking mode
uses the search parameter settings in the above search.

144

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual

8.2.8 Bandwidth search
The bandwidth search is a function for determining the bandwidth of the trace, center frequency, cutoff points (on the higher frequency and the lower frequency sides), Q and insertion loss based on theposition of the active marker or peak marker.
Press the Search button on the front panel to search the bandwidth in the Bandwidth submenu.
Click BW Search Enable and select the On option to search the bandwidth. After the bandwidth
search is completed, a small triangle will be used to mark the cut-off frequency of the trace, and the
bandwidth, center frequency, cut-off frequency, quality factor, and insertion loss will be displayed in
the upper right corner of the window. To turn off the bandwidth search, click BW Search Enableagain and select the Off option. You can set whether to alarm when the bandwidth search fails in theSound On Fail command.

Figure 8-2 Bandwidth search example

8.2.9 Notch search
The notch search function is used to obtain the bandwidth, center frequency, cutoff points (highfrequency side and low-frequency side), Q and insertion loss of a trace based on the active marker orpeak marker position. The notch search function starts from the left side of the active marker positionand ends when points that meet the conditions are found.

www.siglent.com

145

SNA6000A User Manual
Press the Search button on the front panel to search the band stop in the Notch submenu. Click the
Notch Search Enable command and select the On option to perform the band stop search. After theband stop search is completed, a small triangle will be used to mark the cut-off frequency of the trace,and the bandwidth, center frequency, cut-off frequency, quality factor, and insertion loss will be
displayed in the upper right corner of the window. To turn off the band stop search, click the Notch
Search Enable command again and select the Off option. You can set whether to alarm when theband stop search fails in the Sound On Fail command.
The following values are displayed for Bandwidth and Notch Search:⚫

Bandwidth (BW): The difference in frequency between the higher frequency cut-off and lower
frequency cut-off points (High - Low).

⚫

Center frequency (Center): Frequency at the middle point between the lower frequency cut-off
and higher frequency cut-off points. (High + Low)/2.

⚫

Lower frequency cut-off point (Low): Lower frequency of 2 measurement points, both
separated by the defined bandwidth / notch value from the active marker position.

⚫

Higher frequency cut-off point (High): Higher frequency of 2 measurement points, both
separated by the defined bandwidth / notch value from the active marker position.

⚫

Q: Ratio of Center Frequency to Bandwidth (Center Frequency / Bandwidth).

⚫

Insertion loss (loss): The measured value of the position of the center frequency at the time thebandwidth/notch search is executed.

8.3 Mathematical operation
The vector network analyzer supports saving the current data-trace in memory. It can perform fourkinds of mathematical operations on the current data-trace and memory trace. In addition, it cancalculate and display statistical data (mean, standard deviation, and peak-peak) on the data-trace. In
addition, through the built-in formula editor, you can use multiple types of traces from the same ordifferent channels to build custom formulas. When the mathematical operation with memory traceneeds to be carried out, the current data needs to be stored in memory first. Click Data → Memory tocomplete the storage operation. In the Display menu bar, you can select three display modes: Display
data-trace only, display memory trace and display data-trace and memory trace at the same time. The
four mathematical operations of data-trace and memory trace are as follows, in which the values on
data-trace and memory trace are linear:●

Data/Memory: Divide the measured data by the data in the stored trace. Thisfunction can be used
to calculate the ratio of two traces (such as calculating gain or attenuation), which can also be

146

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual
regarded as the normalization operation of test data.
●

Data*Memory: The current measurement data is multiplied by the data in memory.

●

Data+Memory: Current measurement data plus data in memory.

●

Data–Memory: Current measurement data minus data in memory. For example, you can use
this function to store measured data, the error is then subtracted from the DUT measurement.

8.4 Conversion
The vector network analyzer supports parameter conversion, which can convert the S parameter ofthe current trace to the required parameter mode. The vector network analyzer supports the following
8 conversion types.
⚫

Z-Reflect: Impedance in reflection measurement Zr.

Z𝑟 = 𝑍𝑜𝑎 ×⚫

Z-Transmit: Impedance in transmission measurement Zt.

𝑍𝑡 =

⚫

2 × √𝑍0𝑎 × 𝑍0𝑏− (𝑍0𝑎 + 𝑍0𝑏 )𝑆𝑎𝑏

Z-Trans-Shunt: Impedance in parallel transmission Zt.

𝑍𝑡 =

⚫

1 + 𝑆𝑎𝑎
1 − 𝑆𝑎𝑎1
𝑌𝑡

Y-Reflect: Reflection measurement admittance Yr.

𝑌𝑟 =www.siglent.com

1
𝑍𝑟

147

SNA6000A User Manual⚫

Y -Transmit: Admittance in transmission measurement Yt.

𝑌𝑡 =

⚫

1
𝑍𝑡

Y -Trans-Shunt: Admittance in parallel transmission Yt.

𝑌𝑡 =

𝑌01 =

1
𝑍01

𝑌02 =

1
𝑍02

2 × √𝑌01 × 𝑌02− (𝑌01 + 𝑌02 )𝑆𝑎𝑏⚫

1/S: Reciprocal of S parameter.

⚫

Conjugation: Convert the measured value to a complex conjugate number.

148

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual

Figure 8-3 Parameter conversion type

When both the fixture simulation measurement function and the port impedance function are in the“on” state, the system will use the value set in the port impedance conversion. In other cases, thesystem Z0 (preset value: 50 Ω) will be used. The operation steps for selecting the conversion type areas follows:
1. Click Math → Analysis → Conversion enter the selection interface.
2. Select the corresponding conversion type, effective immediately.

8.5 Equation editor
In the equation editor, we can input the algebraic formulas of standard mathematical operators andfunctions, and reference the data available in the vector network analyzer. After a valid formula isentered and enabled, the working trace will be displayed as the result of the set formula and updated
in real-time.
For example, enter the formula S21/(1 - S11). The trace is calculated by dividing each S21 data pointby 1 and subtracting the value of the corresponding S11 data point. For a 201 points sweep, thecalculation is repeated 201 times, once per point. In addition, suppose that the vector network analyzer
is required to measure the directivity of a 3-port device to be tested, and the directivity is not the
www.siglent.com

149

SNA6000A User Manual
measurement parameter of the vector network analyzer, then the formula editor can be used tocomplete the measurement, and the result is the sum and difference of the traces in logarithmic
amplitude format, that is S12 + 𝑆23 − 𝑆13. Because the formula editor operates on linear complex data,
the actual required formula is 𝑆12 ∗ 𝑆23 /𝑆13
Finally, the vertical axis format is set to logarithmic amplitude for display. The operation steps of theequation editor are as follows:
1.

Click Math → Analysis → Equation Editor enter the equation editor interface.

Figure 8-4 Formula editor interface

2.

In the formula edit box, enter functions, operators, and data to form the formula.

3.

After setting the formula, click OK to exit the formula editing interface and click the Equation
status to On to take effect.

Introduction to formula editor interface:⚫

Enable: Select the box to enable the currently entered formula, and clear the box to disable thecurrently edited formula. If the data traces used are from other channels instead of formula
traces, these channels must have the same number of data points to be valid channels.

⚫
150

Functions and Constants: It stores some commonly used functions and constants, as well as
www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual
other functions set by the system.
⚫

Parameter: Select the items that need to be measured only from the working channel.

⚫

History Equation: Used to save previously-stored formulas.

⚫

Store Equation: Store the current input formula to facilitate subsequent use.

⚫

: Move the cursor to the left without clearing the characters.

⚫

→: Move the cursor to the right without clearing the character.

⚫

Backspace: Clear the character while moving the marker to the left.

⚫

Clear: Clear the currently entered formula.

⚫

Numbers, operators, and constants: Numbers, common operators, and constants.

Description of functions and constants in formula editor:
Common functions

DescriptionAbs (complex a)

Returns the sqrt(a.re*a.re+a.im*a.im)

Acos (scalar a)

Returns the arc cosine of a in radians

Asin (scalar a)

Returns the arc sine of a in radians

Atan (scalar a)

Returns the arc tangent of a in radians

atan2 (complex a)

Returns the phase of a = (re, im) in radians

atan2 (scalar a, scalar b)

Returns the phase of (a, b) in radians

Conj (complex a)

Returns the conjugate of aCos (complex a)

Takes a in radians and returns the cosine

Cpx (scalar a, scalar b)

Returns a complex value (a+ib) from two scalar values

Exp (complex a)

Returns the exponential of aIm (complex a)

Returns the imaginary part of a as the scalar part of theresult (zeroes the imaginary part)Ln (complex a)

Returns the natural logarithm of alog10 (complex a)

Returns the base 10 logarithm of a

Mag (complex a)

Returns sqrt(a.re*a.re+a.im*a.im)

Phase (complex a)

Returns atan2(a) in degrees

Pow (complex a,complex b)

Returns a to the power b

Re (complex a)

Returns the scalar part of a (zeroes the imaginary part)Sin (complex a)

Takes a in radians and returns the sine

www.siglent.com

151

SNA6000A User Manual
Sqrt (complex a)

Returns the square root of a, with phase angle in the halfopen interval (-pi/2, pi/2]

Tan (complex a)

Takes a in radians and returns the tangent

Constante2.71828182845904523536

PI

3.14159265358979323846

Advanced function

Description

A (complex a, complex b, complex c, complex d)

F11 conversion = ((1+a)*(1-d) + b*c)/(2*b)

A (scalar i, scalar j)

returns A(Sii, Sji, Sij, Sjj)

B (complex a, complex b, complex c, complex d)

F12 conversion = Z0*((1+a)*(1+d) - b*c)/(2*b)

B (scalar i, scalar j)

returns B(Sii, Sji, Sij, Sjj)

C (complex a, complex b, complex c, complexd)

F21 conversion = (1/Z0)*((1-a)*(1-d)-b*c)/(2*b)

C (scalar i, scalar j)

returns C(Sii, Sji, Sij, Sjj)

D (complex a, complex b, complex c, complexd)

F22 conversion = ((1-a)*(1+d) + b*c)/(2*b)

D (scalar i, scalar j)

returns D(Sii, Sji, Sij, Sjj)

H11 (complex a, complex b, complex c, complexd)

H11 conversion = Z0*((1+a)*(1+d) - b*c)/((1a)*(1+d) + b*c)

H11 (scalar i, scalar j)

returns H11(Sii, Sji, Sij, Sjj)

H12 (complex a, complex b, complex c, complexd)

H12 conversion = 2*c/((1-a)*(1+d) + b*c)

H12 (scalar i, scalar j)

returns H12(Sii, Sji, Sij, Sjj)

H21 (complex a, complex b, complex c, complexd)

H21 conversion = -2*b/((1-a)*(1+d) + b*c)

H21 (scalar i, scalar j)

returns H21(Sii, Sji, Sij, Sjj)

H22 (complex a, complex b, complex c, complexd)

H22 conversion = (1/Z0)*((1-a)*(1-d) - b*c)/((1a)*(1+d) + b*c)

H22 (scalar i, scalar j)

returns H22(Sii, Sji, Sij, Sjj)

Kfac (complex a, complex b, complex c,complex d)

k-factor = (1 - abs(a)^2 - abs(d)^2 + (abs(a*d b*c)^2)/(2*abs(b*c))

Kfac (scalar i, scalar j)

returns kfac(Sii, Sji, Sij, Sjj)

152

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual
MAPG (complex a, complex b, complex c,complex d)

maximum available power gain = abs(b/c)*(kfac (a,b,c,d) - sqrt (kfac (a,b,c,d)^2 - 1))

MAPG (scalar i, scalar j)

Returns MAPG(Sii, Sji, Sij, Sjj)

MSG (complex a, complex b, complex c,complex d)

maximum stable power gain = abs(b)/abs(c)MSG (scalar i, scalar j)

Returns MSG(Sii, Sji, Sij, Sjj)

mu1 (complex a, complex b, complex c,complex d)

μ-factor = (1 - abs(a)^2) / (abs(d - conj(a) *(a*d-b*c)) + abs(b*c))

mu1 (scalar i, scalar j)

Returns mu1(Sii, Sji, Sij, Sjj)

mu2 (complex a, complex b, complex c,complex d)

μ-factor = (1 - abs(d)^2) / (abs(a - conj(d) *(a*d-b*c)) + abs(b*c))

mu2 (scalar i, scalar j)

Returns mu2(Sii, Sji, Sij, Sjj)

T11 (complex a, complex b, complex c, complexd)

T11 conversion = -(a*d - b*c)/b

T11 (scalar i, scalar j)

Returns T11(Sii, Sji, Sij, Sjj)

T12 (complex a, complex b, complex c, complexd)

T12 conversion = a/b

T12 (scalar i, scalar j)

Returns T12(Sii, Sji, Sij, Sjj)

T21 (complex a, complex b, complex c, complexd)

T21 conversion = -d/b

T21 (scalar i, scalar j)

Returns T21(Sii, Sji, Sij, Sjj)

T22 (complex a, complex b, complex c, complexd)

T22 conversion = 1/b

T22 (scalar i, scalar j)

Returns T22(Sii, Sji, Sij, Sjj)

Y11 (complex a, complex b, complex c, complexd)

Y11 conversion = (1/Z0)*((1-a)*(1+d) +b*c)/((1+a)*(1+d) - b*c)

Y11 (scalar i, scalar j)

Returns Y11(Sii, Sji, Sij, Sjj)

Y12 (complex a, complex b, complex c, complexd)

Y12 conversion = (1/Z0)*(-2*c)/((1+a)*(1+d) b*c)

Y12 (scalar i, scalar j)

Returns Y12(Sii, Sji, Sij, Sjj)

Y21 (complex a, complex b, complex c, complexd)

Y21 conversion = (1/Z0)*(-2*b)/((1+a)*(1+d) b*c)

Y21 (scalar i, scalar j)

Returns Y21(Sii, Sji, Sij, Sjj)

Y22 (complex a, complex b, complex c, complexd)

Y22 conversion = (1/Z0)*((1+a)*(1-d) +b*c)/((1+a)*(1+d) - b*c)

www.siglent.com

153

SNA6000A User Manual
Y22 (scalar i, scalar j)

Returns Y22(Sii, Sji, Sij, Sjj)

Z11 (complex a, complex b, complex c, complexd)

Z11 conversion = Z0*((1+a)*(1-d) + b*c)/((1a)*(1-d) - b*c)

Z11 (scalar i, scalar j)

Returns Z11(Sii, Sji, Sij, Sjj)

Z12 (complex a, complex b, complex c, complexd)

Z12 conversion = Z0*(2*c)/((1-a)*(1-d) - b*c)

Z12 (scalar i, scalar j)

Returns Z12(Sii, Sji, Sij, Sjj)

Z21 (complex a, complex b, complex c, complexd)

Z21 conversion = Z0*(2*b)/((1-a)*(1-d) - b*c)

Z21 (scalar i, scalar j)

Returns Z21(Sii, Sji, Sij, Sjj)

Z22 (complex a, complex b, complex c, complexd)

Z22 conversion = Z0*((1-a)*(1+d) + b*c)/((1a)*(1-d) - b*c)

Z22 (scalar i, scalar j)

Returns Z22(Sii, Sji, Sij, Sjj)

Channel parameter data
data

Corrected data

data(scalar i)

Corrected data of trace i (trace number)mem

Memory datamem(scalar i)

Memory data of trace i (trace number)

xAxis

X-axis data

xAxis(scalar i)

X-axis data of trace i (trace number)

S11 - S44

S-parameter data

Common H parameter, Y parameter, Z parameter, F parameter, and T parameter definition (2port network):
1)

Mixing Parameter(H)𝑉1𝐼( ) = (𝐻) ( 1 )
𝑉2
𝐼2

2)

𝐻12
)
𝐻22

𝑌
(𝑌) = ( 11
𝑌21

𝑌12
)
𝑌22

Admittance parameter(Y)𝐼1𝑉( ) = (𝑌) ( 1 )
𝑉
𝐼2
2

154

𝐻
(𝐻) = ( 11𝐻21www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual3)

Impedance parameter(Z)𝑉1𝐼( ) = (𝑍) ( 1 )
𝐼2
𝑉2

4)

𝑍12
)
𝑍22

Basic parameter(F)𝑉1𝑉( ) = (𝐹) ( 2 )
−𝐼2
𝐼2

5)

𝑍
(𝑍) = ( 11𝑍21(𝐹) = (𝐴 𝐵 )𝐶 𝐷Scattering transmission parameter(T)𝑎1𝑏(𝑏 ) = (𝑇) ( 2 )
𝑎2
1

𝑎1 =

𝑏1 =

𝑉1 + 𝐼1 𝑍0
2 ∙ √𝑍0

𝑉1 − 𝐼1 𝑍0
2 ∙ √𝑍0

𝑇(𝑇) = ( 11
𝑇21

𝑎2 =

𝑏2 =

𝑇12
)
𝑇22

𝑉2 + 𝐼2 𝑍0
2 ∙ √𝑍0

𝑉2 − 𝐼2 𝑍0
2 ∙ √𝑍0

S parameter convert to H parameter, Y parameter, Z parameter, F parameter and T parameter(2-port network):
1)

S parameter convert to H parameter

𝐻11 = 𝑍0 ∙𝐻12 =2 ∙ 𝑆12(1 − 𝑆11 )(1 + 𝑆22 ) + 𝑆12 𝑆21

𝐻21 =−2 ∙ 𝑆21(1 − 𝑆11 )(1 + 𝑆22 ) + 𝑆12 𝑆21

𝐻22 =www.siglent.com(1 + 𝑆11 )(1 + 𝑆22 ) − 𝑆12 𝑆21(1 − 𝑆11 )(1 + 𝑆22 ) + 𝑆12 𝑆21

1 (1 − 𝑆11 )(1 − 𝑆22 ) − 𝑆12 𝑆21∙
𝑍0 (1 − 𝑆11 )(1 + 𝑆22 ) + 𝑆12 𝑆21

155

SNA6000A User Manual

2)

3)

4)

S parameter convert to Y parameter𝑌11 =1 (1 − 𝑆11 )(1 + 𝑆22 ) + 𝑆12 𝑆21∙
𝑍0 (1 + 𝑆11 )(1 + 𝑆22 ) − 𝑆12 𝑆21

𝑌12 =

1
−2 ∙ 𝑆12∙𝑍0 (1 + 𝑆11 )(1 + 𝑆22 ) − 𝑆12 𝑆21

𝑌21 =

1
−2 ∙ 𝑆21∙
𝑍0 (1 + 𝑆11 )(1 + 𝑆22 ) − 𝑆12 𝑆21

𝑌22 =

1 (1 + 𝑆11 )(1 − 𝑆22 ) + 𝑆12 𝑆21∙
𝑍0 (1 + 𝑆11 )(1 + 𝑆22 ) − 𝑆12 𝑆21

S parameter convert to Z parameter
𝑍11 = 𝑍0 ∙(1 + 𝑆11 )(1 − 𝑆22 ) + 𝑆12 𝑆21(1 − 𝑆11 )(1 − 𝑆22 ) − 𝑆12 𝑆21

𝑍12 = 𝑍0 ∙2 ∙ 𝑆12(1 − 𝑆11 )(1 − 𝑆22 ) − 𝑆12 𝑆21

𝑍21 = 𝑍0 ∙2 ∙ 𝑆21(1 − 𝑆11 )(1 − 𝑆22 ) − 𝑆12 𝑆21

𝑍22 = 𝑍0 ∙(1 − 𝑆11 )(1 + 𝑆22 ) + 𝑆12 𝑆21(1 − 𝑆11 )(1 − 𝑆22 ) − 𝑆12 𝑆21

S parameter convert to basic parameter

A=

156

(1 + 𝑆11 )(1 − 𝑆22 ) + 𝑆12 𝑆21
2 ∙ 𝑆21www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual

B = 𝑍0 ∙C=

1 (1 − 𝑆11 )(1 − 𝑆22 ) − 𝑆12 𝑆21∙
𝑍0
2 ∙ 𝑆21D=

5)(1 + 𝑆11 )(1 + 𝑆22 ) − 𝑆12 𝑆21
2 ∙ 𝑆21(1 − 𝑆11 )(1 + 𝑆22 ) + 𝑆12 𝑆21
2 ∙ 𝑆21

S parameter convert to T parameter

𝐷𝑠 = 𝑆11 𝑆22 − 𝑆12 𝑆21
𝑇11 =

−𝐷𝑠
𝑆21

𝑇12 =

𝑆11
𝑆21

𝑇21 =

−𝑆22
𝑆21

𝑇22 =

1
𝑆21

Description of formula editor’s operator:
Operator

Description

Operator

Description

+

plus

(

opening parenthesis

-

minus

)

closing parenthesis*

multiply,comma, parameter separator/

divide

=

equal

^

power

E

exponent

Note: operator priority:
www.siglent.com

157

SNA6000A User Manual
1. ^2. *, /
3. +, -

8.6 Trace statistics
Click Math → Analysis → Statistics, set the status to On to open the statistics function. The upper
right corner of the interface will display the mean value, standard deviation, and peak to peak valueof the current working trace.

Figure 8-5 Statistical data interface

8.7 Limit test
Limit Line is a test form that can visualize test data and results. The limit test compares the measured
data with the defined limit and provides the qualified or unqualified judgment information of eachmeasured data point. Limit line and limit test are not suitable for smith chart and polar coordinate
display formats, and limit line and limit test functions are automatically disabled for these display types.

Limit table setting
Click Math → Analysis → Limit and the pop-up dialog box is shown in the figure below. Limit test,
sound type, limit table, global pass/fail can be set in this interface.

158

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual

Figure 8-6 Limit test interface

Limit test:⚫

Limit test on: Check this box to compare the data with the limit and display “pass” or “Fail”
judgment result.

⚫

Limit line on: Check this box to display the limit on the screen.

⚫

Sound on fail: When this box is selected, when the point on the trace fails in the limit test, a beep
will sound.

Sound type:⚫

Sound on fail: When this box is checked, the equipment will beep when the test fails.

⚫

Sound on pass: When this box is checked, the equipment will beep when the test passes.

Limit table:⚫

Show table: Check this box to open a table at the bottom of the screen to create and edit limits.

⚫

Load table: Call the saved limit table, the saved format of the limit table is CSV by default.

Global pass / fail:Pass / fail indicator is a convenient way to monitor all measurement status.
Global pass / fail on - Check this box to display the global pass / fail status.
www.siglent.com

159

SNA6000A User Manual
Policy - Select which of the following requirements must be met for the global pass/fail status todisplay “pass”:⚫

All tests must pass - This setting will read the results from the limit test. If all tests (limit test ison) pass, the global pass/fail status will be “pass”.

⚫

All measurements must pass - Unless all measured data points are within the established test
limits and the limit test is “on”, the global pass/fail status will be “fail”.

Note: In this mode, if there is a test that does not set the limit test to the on state, the global pass /fail will display “fail”.

Limit line setting
Click Math → Analysis → Limit Table → Limit to open the limit line setting interface, we can also
click Math → Analysis → Limit → Show Table to open the limit line setting interface, as shown in
the figure below.

Figure 8-7 Limit line setting interface

Limit line type:⚫

Unused: Invalid limit line.

⚫

Max: Above this limit line, the measurement fails.

⚫

Min: Below this limit line, the measurement fails.

⚫

Delete: Delete limit line.

Begin stimulus: Frequency of the limit line’s starting point.
End stimulus: Frequency of the limit line’s ending point.
Begin response: Response of the limit line’s starting point.

160

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual
End response: Response of the limit line’s ending point.

8.8 Point Limit test
Overview
Point Limit is a test form that can visualize test data and results. The limit test compares themeasured data with the defined limit and provides the qualified or unqualified judgment informationof the measured data point. Point Limit and limit test are not suitable for smith chart and polar
display formats, and point limit and limit test functions are automatically disabled for these display
types.

Point Limit table setting
Click Math → Analysis → Point Limit and the pop-up dialog box is shown in the figure below. Point
Limit Test, Sound Type, Point Limit Table can be set in this interface.

Figure 8-8 Point Limit test interface

Point Limit test:

www.siglent.com

161

SNA6000A User Manual●

Point Limit test on: Check this box to compare the data with the limit and display “pass” or“Fail” judgment result.

●

Point Limit on: Check this box to display the limit on the screen.

●

Sound on fail: When this box is selected, when the measurement point fails in the limit test, a
beep will sound.

Sound type:●

Sound on fail: When this box is checked, the equipment will beep when the test fails.

●

Sound on pass: When this box is checked, the equipment will beep when the test passes.

Point Limit table:●

Show table: Check this box to open a table at the bottom of the screen to create and edit point
limits.

●Load table: Call the saved limit table, The saved format of the limit table is CSV by default.

Point Limit setting
Click Math → Analysis → Limit Table → Point Limit to open the point limit setting interface, we canalso click Math → Analysis → Limit → Point Limit→ Show Table to open the point limit settinginterface, as shown in the figure below.

Figure 8-9 Point Limit setting interface

Point Limit type:

162⚫

Unused: Invalid point limit.

⚫

On: Open point test limit.

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual⚫

Delete: Delete point limit.

Stimulus: Frequency of the point limit.
Lower Limit: Lower limit of response value for point limit.
Upper Limit: Upper limit of response value for point limit.

8.9 Ripple limit test
The ripple limit test function can be performed independently of the limit test function, and the ripple
limit can be set to evaluate whether the measurement result is qualified or unqualified. Ripple is definedas the difference between the maximum value and the minimum value within the specified excitation
range. The ripple limit function is only applicable to the measured point value, not to the interpolation.
Ripple table setting
Click Math → Analysis → Limit → Ripple to open the ripple test setting interface, we can set ripple
test, sound type, and ripple table in this interface.

Figure 8-10 Ripple test setting interface

Ripple test:⚫

Ripple test on: Check this box to set the ripple test to “on” state and display “pass” or “Fail”.

www.siglent.com

163

SNA6000A User Manual⚫

Ripple line on: Check this box to display the ripple limit line on the screen.

⚫

Sound on fail: When this box is checked, the VNA will beep when the test fails.

Sound type:⚫

Sound on fail: When this box is checked, the equipment will beep when the test fails.

⚫

Sound on pass: When this box is checked, the equipment will beep when the test passes.

Ripple table:⚫

Show table: Check this box to display a table at the bottom of the screen for creating andediting limits.

⚫

Load table: Call the saved ripple limit table.

⚫

Save table: Save the ripple limit table, the saved format of the ripple table is CSV by default.

Ripple limit line setting
Click Math → Analysis → Limit Table → Ripple to open the ripple limit setting interface, we canalso click Math → Analysis → Limit → Ripple → Show Table to open the ripple limit settinginterface, as shown in the figure below.

Figure 8-11 Ripple limit setting interface

Type:

164

⚫

Unused: Invalid ripple test line.

⚫

On: Open ripple test limit line.

⚫

Delete: Delete ripple test limit line.

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual
Begin stimulus: Frequency of ripple limit line’s starting point.
End stimulus: Frequency of ripple limit line’s ending point.
Max ripple: Maximum value of ripple test.
Absolute: The difference between the maximum and minimum in the frequency band.
Margin: The difference between the absolute value of ripple and the limit value.

8.10 Bandwidth limit test
The bandwidth limit test function can be used to test the bandwidth of a bandpass filter. The
bandwidth limit test can find the peak value in the bandwidth, and find the frequency points lower
than the specified value of the peak value on the left and right sides of the peak point, and thefrequency between these two points is the filter bandwidth, and then compare the obtained
bandwidth with the minimum and maximum allowable bandwidth specified in advance.

Bandwidth test setting
Click Math → Analysis → Limit → Bandwidth to open the broadband test setting interface, we canset bandwidth test, sound type, and target bandwidth in this interface.

Figure 8-12 Bandwidth test setting interfacewww.siglent.com

165

SNA6000A User Manual
Bandwidth test:⚫

Bandwidth test on: Check this box to set the bandwidth limit test state to on.

⚫

Bandwidth marker on: Check this box to display the bandwidth on the screen.

⚫

Sound on fail: When this box is selected, an alarm will sound when the bandwidth limit test
fails.

Target bandwidth:⚫

N dB points: Specifies the bandwidth threshold in dB.

⚫

Min bandwidth: Enter the lower limit of bandwidth in Hz.

⚫

Max bandwidth: Enter the upper limit of bandwidth in Hz.

Note: If the data format is Smith chart or polar coordinate format, the bandwidth test is skipped.

8.11 Time domain
A vector network analyzer is usually used to measure the frequency domain characteristics of the DUT.
For the time domain characteristics of the DUT, the frequency domain parameters can be obtained byinverse Fourier transform. The time-domain characteristics use time as the horizontal axis to display
the measurement results. Then the characteristics of the DUT can be observed from two different visual
angles of frequency domain and time domain by the vector network analyzer.

8.11.1 Transform
Click Math → Time Domain → Time Domain Setup → Transform to open the time domain transformsetting interface, we can set the start time, stop time, center time, span, transform mode in this interface.

166

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual

Figure 8-13 Time domain setting interface

Transform switch: Check the transform switch to switch to time-domain mode.
Start time: Set the start time of transformation displayed.
Stop time: Set the stop time of transformation displayed.
Center time: Set the center time of transformation displayed.
Time span: Set the time span of the transformation displayed on the screen of VNA.

Transform mode:●Low pass impulse:High resolution, suitable for viewing the small response of the device propagating low-frequency
signal. In this low pass impulse mode, the frequency expands to DC and negative frequency.
Therefore, when we click Set Low Pass Frequencies, the starting frequency will be
automatically adjusted, which will affect the calibration accuracy. Therefore, it is necessary tocalibrate after setting the time domain measurement parameters.

●

Low pass step:
The simplest way to determine the discontinuities caused by inductors and capacitors inequipment that propagate low frequency signals.

●

Bandpass:
The simplest method, which can be used with any frequency sweep, it is most useful whenmeasuring devices with limited bandwidth. Capacitance and inductance reactance will not be

www.siglent.com

167

SNA6000A User Manual
shown. For the same frequency range and number of points, the bandwidth of bandpass mode istwice that of impulse mode, which will hide the closely spaced response and reduce theresponse resolution. The measurement range is inversely proportional to the frequency step.

Set low pass frequencies:
It can only be used in low pass mode. After clicking Set Low Pass Frequencies, the measurement
range is inversely proportional to the starting frequency. Recalculate the start frequency and step
frequency as the harmonics of the starting frequency. Calculate the starting frequency according to
the formula of low pass start frequency = stop frequency/points. The calculated value must not beless than the minimum frequency of the vector network analyzer. The number of points or stopfrequency may change.

8.11.2 Gating
The gating function of a vector network analyzer is the most useful feature in time domain transform.
When the time domain characteristics of the equipment need to be viewed, the gating function can
only choose the required time-domain response, eliminate unnecessary time domain response, andthen view the frequency domain characteristic curve of the required response through Fouriertransform. The gating function enables the DUT to be characterized without connectors or adapters.

Click Math → Time Gating → Gating Setup → Gating to open the gating setting interface, then we
could set the start time, stop time, center time, span, gate type, and gate shape in this interface.

168

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual

Figure 8-14 Gating setting interface

Gating on: Open or close the gating function.
Start time: Set the start time of gating.
Stop time: Set the stop time of the gate.
Center time: Set the center time of the gate.
Time span: Set the time span of the gate.
Gate type: Sets the type of filtering performed by the gating function.
⚫

Bandpass: Keep the response in the gating span.

⚫

Notch: Remove response using the gating span.

Gate shape: Set the filter characteristics of the gating function. There are four options: minimum,
normal, wide, and maximum.

The parameter definition of the gating function is shown in the figure below:

www.siglent.com

169

SNA6000A User ManualGat e s hape
B andwidt h ripple
Gat e marker-6dB

S idelobe level

T1
Gat e start ti me

Gat e s top tim e

Figure 8-15 Diagram of gating

Parameter description of gating function:
Gate shape

Bandwidth ripple

Sidelobe level

Minimum±0.1 dB-25dB

Normal±0.1 dB

-45dB

Wide

±0.1 dB-52dB

Maximum±0.01 dB

-80dB

8.11.3 Window
There will be sudden changes in the start and stop of frequency domain parameter measurement,
which will lead to overshoot and ringing in the time domain. The window function is helpful to reduce
the overshoot and ringing in the process of frequency domain and time domain conversion.

Click Math → Time Gating → Gating Setup → Window to open the window setting interface, we
can set the window size, The size of the window should be balanced between response resolution
and dynamic range. Setting the minimum window can get the best response resolution, and setting
the maximum window can get the maximum dynamic range.

170

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual

Figure 8-16 Window setting interface

Three methods of setting window size:⚫

Minimum-maximum: Use the mouse or touch screen to move the slider to change the window
size.

⚫

Kaiser Beta: Use the value of Kaiser Beta to change the window size.

⚫

Impulse width: Use the value of impulse width to change the window size.

Figure 8-17 Diagram of maximum and minimum windowwww.siglent.com

171

SNA6000A User Manual

8.11.4 Coupling
Trace coupling allows to change the measured time-domain parameters and make all other measured
parameters in the channel change the same. For example, to view the frequency-domain and timedomain measurement parameters at the same time, first turn on the coupling switch and select all thegating parameters in the coupling setting interface, at the same time, the parameters of gate span arechanged in time domain measurement, the frequency-domain measurement parameters will bechanged automatically to reflect the effect the time domain gate span parameters are modified. The
trace coupling is only applicable to Y-axis scale / reference settings. The results of trace coupling do
not change the measured data.

Click Math → Time Gating → Gating Setup → Coupling to open the coupling setting interface, we
can set transmission parameters and gating parameters in this interface.

Figure 8-18 Coupling setting interface

Coupling on: Click to enable coupling. At this time, all measurements in the channel are coupled.
The following conversion parameters and gating parameters can be used for coupling.

Transform parameters:

172⚫

Stimulus: Setting of the start time, stop time, center time, and span.

⚫

State(On/Off): State of the transform.
www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual⚫

Window: Kaiser Beta and pulse width parameter.

⚫

Mode: Low pass pulse, low pass step, bandpass.

⚫

Distance marker unit: When selected, all measured distance marker units are coupled.

Gating parameters:⚫

Stimulus: Setting of the start time, stop time, center time, and span.

⚫

State (On/Off): Switch of gating function.

⚫

Shape: “Minimum”, “normal”, “wide” and “maximum”.

⚫

Type: Bandpass and notch filtering.

8.11.5 Marker
When a marker is added to a time-domain parameter, the distance parameter is automaticallydisplayed in the marker reading. These settings only affect the display of all markers of the active
measurement (Unless the distance marker unit is coupled in the trace coupling box).
Click Math → Time Gating → Gating Setup → Marker to open marker setting interface. Set themarker mode, units, and velocity factor in this interface.

Figure 8-19 Marker setting interfacewww.siglent.com

173

SNA6000A User ManualMarker mode: Specify the marker mode to determine the correct marking distance displayed.
Generally, Auto can be selected when measuring S parameter, and Reflection or Transmission canbe selected when measuring any ratio parameter.
⚫

Auto: If the measurement parameter is S parameter, Reflection or Transmission will beselected automatically. If the measurement parameter is a non-S parameter, Reflection will
be selected automatically.

⚫

Reflection: Displays the distance from the source to the receiver and the return path, thendivides by 2 (compensated return path).

⚫

Transmission: Displays the distance from the source to the receiver.

Units: Specifies the unit for the displayed marker distance value, there are three options: meter, feet,and inches.

Velocity factor: Set the velocity factor of the transmission line, where the value of PE is 0.66, PTFE
is 0.7 and the corresponding value of vacuum is 1.

8.11.6 AdvanceDescription
In time-domain low-pass pulse and step transformation modes, users can choose to use theautomatic extrapolation function provided by the instrument to determine the DC component value, or
customize the extrapolation value.

DC Value174

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual

DC Value Setting
Entry: Math → Time Domain → Time Domain Setup → Advance → DC Value
Auto Extrapolate Switch: (Auto Extrapolate) Used to turn on or off the automatic extrapolation
processing of the instrument.
User Manual Entry: Users can manually enter custom DC values or click on the Extrapolate button
to obtain the values extrapolated by the instrument based on the latest data. In addition, the UI also
provides convenient input of Open, Short, and Load configuration values, allowing users to freely
choose appropriate extrapolation values based on the DUT type.

www.siglent.com

175

SNA6000A User Manual

9 Save and Recall
The vector network analyzer supports save and recall functions for files of various formats. Press the
Save/Recall button on the front panel and select file, data, calibration data, and images to save or
recall, in the menu bar on the right side of the screen.

Figure 9-9-1 Operating interface

Description of supported file formats:⚫

CSA file: Save the status information and calibration data of the equipment.

⚫

STA file: Save device status information.

⚫

CSV file: Save trace data information.

⚫

CAL file: Save calibration data.

⚫

SnP file: also known as Touchstone file. Touchstone file is a standard format file used forvarious simulation software. The simulation software calls this file to represent a device or
circuit. TouchStone file names all have a. snp extension. N represents the number of ports
S2p represents a 2-port network. S4p represents a 4-port network. Taking a TouchStone filefrom a two port network as an example. This file is a plain text file that can be opened
directly with Notepad.The S parameters of the two port network have a total of 9 columns,
arranged in the order of frequency, amplitude S11, phase S11, amplitude S21, phase S21,
amplitude S12, phase S12, amplitude S22, and phase S22. The frequency is arranged in

176

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual
ascending order from top to bottom, with no strict spacing in between, but must be inascending order.It is worth noting that in the TouchStone file measured with VNA, there is
no DC point, which means there is no 0 frequency, and it cannot be directly called bysimulation software. It needs to be edited to supplement the 0 frequency and corresponding
S parameter values. In this example, dB in the first row represents the expression ofcomplex numbers, where dB represents amplitude in dB and phase in angle. If MA isdisplayed at this position in the file, it means that both amplitude and phase are represented
by actual numerical values. R50 represents a reference resistance of 50 ohms for matching.
⚫

PNG/JPG/BMP files: Save screenshots.

Recall:⚫

Recall State: Use the Recall State command in the Recall submenu and select to call thedesired device state in. sta file format.

⚫

Recall State + Cal: Use the Recall State+Cal command in the Recall submenu, select tocall the required device status and calibration data in. csa file format.

⚫

Recall Register: Use the Recall Register command in the Recall submenu to select theregister data to be called.

⚫

Recall Cal: Use the Recall Cal command in the Recall submenu and select to call therequired calibration data in. cal file format.

Save State:⚫

Save State: Use the Save State As command in the Save State submenu to save device
status information.

⚫

Save Register: Use the Save Register command in the Save State submenu to save thedata in the register.

⚫

Save State + Cal: Select the State+Cal Data setting in the Save Type submenu, and whensaving the file, both device status information and calibration data will be saved.

Recall Data:⚫

Recall Data: Use the Recall Data command in the Recall submenu and select to call data
as a CSV file or SNP file. You can choose to load file data into the current channel, create a
new channel, or select the current trace in the dropdown menu of Recall Data.

⚫

Interpolation: When calling data, optimize trace data by setting whether to interpolate
based on the difference between the number of data points in the file and the number ofchannel scanning points.

Save Data:

www.siglent.com

177

SNA6000A User Manual⚫

Save Trc Data: Use the Save Trc Data command in the Save data submenu to save theselected trace information in CSV format; When there are multiple trace data in the channel,
use the Save Malti Trc command to select the trace that needs to be saved, thereby saving
multiple trace data. You can choose the format for saving LinMag/Angle (linear
amplitude/phase), LogMag/Angle (logarithmic amplitude/phase), Displayed (current
displayed data), or Real/Imaginary data from the CSV Format drop-down menu.

⚫

Save SnP: Use the Save SnP command in the Save data submenu to save trace
information in SnP format. When selecting to save trace information in SnP format, you canchoose LinMag/Angle (linear amplitude/phase), LogMag/Angle (logarithmic
amplitude/phase), Real/Imaginary (real/imaginary) data saving formats from the SnP Format
drop-down menu.

Save Other:⚫

Screenshot: Use the Screenshot command in the Save Other submenu to save thescreenshot. You can set the default path in the pop-up dialog box and save the screenshot
in PNG/JPG/BMP file format.

⚫

Save Cal: Use the Save Cal command in the Save Other submenu to save channel
calibration data in. cal format.

File management:
Click File Browser command to open the file browser, File management can be carried out in the filebrowser.

178

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual
Figure 9-9-1 File management interface

Save trace data CSV:
In order to facilitate users in saving multiple trace data, the data of the currently selected trace will besaved when there is only one trace in the current channel. If there are multiple traces in the current
channel, clicking "save trc data" will bring up the following dialog box for users to choose the trace
data to save:

Trace selection guide"All" is used to select or cancel all traces of the current channel. After determining the trace to be
saved, click OK, confirm the file name and save path, and then save the data.
In material measurement mode, in order to facilitate the user's saving of measurement results(relative permittivity, dielectric loss index, magnetic permeability, and magnetic loss index), when theuser selects a trace of measurement type μ or ε, the above measurement results will be
automatically saved. If the currently selected measurement type is not μ or ε, it is consistent with thenormal trace saving mode, and the data to be saved in the CSV file is determined by selecting thetrace.

Save SNP file:
The Snp file is mainly used to save the measured S parameters. In order to facilitate users in saving
the required S parameters, they can select the port and click on the "save snp" submenu item. The
following dialog box will pop up:

www.siglent.com

179

SNA6000A User ManualPorts selection guide
Users can save the corresponding S parameters by selecting the corresponding port.
The data obtained during balance measurement is the balance S parameter. In order to facilitate
users in saving the corresponding balance S parameters during balance measurement, they can clickon the "save snp" submenu item after selecting the balance measurement trace. At this time, theoption on the port selection interface is the logical port, which is associated with the set port topology.
After selecting the corresponding balance port, the corresponding balance S parameters can besaved.

180www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual

10 TDR Measurement
10.1 Overview
Measured frequency responses can be transformed to the time domain to analyze the time-domaincharacteristics of the DUT. The TDR option provides the time domain reflection/transmission analysis
functions and eye diagram simulation function, which can help users save time and money byminimizing the need for other test equipment Time domain analysis also has some irreplaceable
advantages:
1.

Time-domain analysis shows the positions and properties of the impedance discontinuities on
DUT. It can be easy to acquire the impedance value at any point on the transmission line byanalyzing the time domain reflection characteristics. It's helpful to locate the faults ontransmission lines.

2.

Using the time domain gating function to remove the influences of the impedance discontinuities,
it becomes possible to simulate the frequency domain characteristics of DUT after the faults are
removed.

3.

The eye diagram simulation function doesn't need any external waveform generators. The VNA
uses a built-in virtual bit pattern generator to provide the input signal. It's a very important tool for
signal integrality analysis.

4.

If you want to design a compensation network for high-speed digital signal transmission byemphasis/ de-emphasis or equalization, the advanced waveform function in TDR waveform will
be of vital use for you. You don't need to change the DUT connection or any extra devices, it's
easy to simulate the eye diagrams with the different compensation methods.

5.

You can directly inject jitter into the input signal for eye diagram simulations. A statistical eye
diagram is introduced to simulate the probability density of the output signals.

When using the TDR option, there are some notes:
1.

When opening the TDR option or switching the DUT topology, calibration and deskew data will becleared. Please finish the calibration wizard before measuring to get the correct results. Save thecalibration data and recall it when required, which can avoid unnecessary calibration operations.

2.

Please operate in the bottom toolbar of the TDR menu as far as possible. The function in the TDR
option desends on the time domain transform, so changing settings in the right toolbars can leadto incorrect transform results.

3.

Don't close the eye diagram module while the eye diagram is drawing, or an unexpected error

www.siglent.com

181

SNA6000A User Manual
might occur. Unless necessary, don't switch between the TDR/TDT module and the eye diagram
module, for the last eye diagram will be drawn when it's switched to the eye diagram module,
which might take a long time.
4.

It's NOT recommended to add too many traces, or the trace data update will be slow.

5.

If there are too many windows or too much information in a window to observe the information or
traces, it will be useful to maximize the window or trace.

10.2 Open/Close/Preset TDR Option
Option TDR must be enabled.
To switch on the TDR option, use the order Math->TDR->TDR, then the button "On" will be selected.
The TDR toolbar will appear at the bottom of the screen, and the TDR option function will be open to
the user. If you have the trial license for the TDR option, an information dialog will appear to notify
you that the trial times will decrease. If the trial times expire, a permanent license is needed to switch
on the TDR option.

Figure 10-10-1 TDR Option interface

182

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual
To close the TDR option, use the order Math->TDR->TDR again, then the button “Off” will be selected,
VNA will restore the state before the option opened. Click the

button at the top right corner of the

TDR toolbar will close the TDR option too.
Click the Preset button in the Basic bar of the Setup tab in the TDR toolbar and the VNA will preset
the TDR option: Clear the calibration data, allocate the traces and windows automatically, and reset
the settings in the option. After the TDR option is started, the calibration wizard will need to be run
again.

10.3 TDR Setup Wizard
The TDR setup wizard pops up when the TDR option is switched on for the first time. Click thecheckbox “Show this wizard next start-up” to decide whether the wizard pops up when opening theoption or not. The wizard can be opened by clicking the Setup Wizard button in the Basic bar of the
Setup tab in the TDR toolbar.

Figure 10-10-2 TDR Setup Wizard

The wizard will guide you to finish the DUT topology selection, port extension setup, DUT length
measurement, and stimulus rise time setting. The calibration type can be selected in the Error Correct
bar on the first page of the wizard, and the wizard will also guide you to finish the calibration you select.
The calibration operation will be illustrated in detail in the section “TDR calibration”.
www.siglent.com

183

SNA6000A User Manual
If you don't need to finish the setup in the wizard immediately, you can close the wizard. But thecalibration is necessary before accurate measurement or analysis.

10.4 Calibration for TDR Option
There are two calibration types in the TDR option: Deskew or Deskew & Loss Compensation. The
former only moves the reference plane to the end of the cables connected to the ports of VNA, ignoring
the signal loss in the cables. And the latter tries to compensate the loss in the cables.

Figure 10-10-3 TDR Calibration Tab

10.4.1 Deskew
Click the Deskew button in the Basic bar of the Setup tab in the TDR toolbar to open the Deskew
dialog. Connect all cables and fixtures to the VNA, and connect the other ends of the fixtures to nothingor the OPEN calibration kit. Then click the Deskew button in the dialog, and click the Finish button
after amark appears at the Deskew button to finish the Deskew calibration.

Click the Option button to open the Deskew Option dialog, in which you can select the calibration
type or operate the calibration one-by-one for each port. The calibration type can be selected by theStandard Type pull-down menu. It's set to Open by default. If you choose the Short option, you
should connect the SHORT calibration kit to the port to finish the calibration. You can calibrate only
one port at a click on the corresponding Port button, but you should finish the calibration of all ports
to finish the task in the dialog.

184

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual

Figure 10-10-4 TDR Deskew Wizard

10.4.2 Deskew & Loss Compensation
Click the Deskew&Loss button in the Basic bar of the Setup tab in the TDR toolbar to open the
Deskew & Loss Compensation wizard. The wizard can be divided into 3 steps, which guide you tofinish the Deskew and Loss Compensation calibration.
At the first step, a Deskew calibration is required. The method is the same as the operation introducedin the section “Deskew”.
At the second step, the calibration operation depends on the correct DUT topology. Under the topology
Single-Ended 1 Port, you need to connect the cables and fixtures to the VNA, connect the other endsof the fixtures to nothing or an OPEN calibration element. Click the Measure button in the wizard, wait
for themark to appear at the Measure button to finish the second step of calibration. Under other

DUT topologies, you need to connect two cables and fixtures, which are connected to the ports as the
wizard instructs, to both ends of a THRU calibration kit. Click the Measure button in the wizard, wait
for themark to appear at the Measure button, then execute the next operation. If under Single-

Ended 4-Port or Differential 2-Port, you will need to execute the operation as stated above once foreach page of the wizard respectively to finish the second step.
At the third step, you can connect the LOAD calibration element to every port, and click thecorresponding Port button to execute the calibration step. The step is optional, so it's not necessary tofinish the calibration wizard.

www.siglent.com

185

SNA6000A User Manual
If you finish all necessary calibration operations, click the Apply button to save and apply new
calibration data, and click the Finish button to close the wizard.

Figure 10-10-5 TDR Deskew & Loss Wizard

At any step of the wizard, it's allowed to execute a calibration operation repeatedly, new measured
data will replace original data. You can click the Close button to close the wizard, which will give up
all data measured in the wizard unless you have clicked Apply button to save them.

10.5 TDR Channel Setup
When the TDR function is activated, the current state is saved, and all existing traces and channels
are deleted, and a new channel is added for the option. When the option is closed, all traces and thechannel being used are deleted, and the instrument is returned to the state before TDR was opened.
The current channel settings can be changed in the TDR toolbar at the bottom of the screen, usuallyin the Setup tab.

186

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual

Figure 10-10-6 TDR Setup Tab

10.5.1 DUT Topology
In addition to the Setup wizard, the DUT topology can be changed in the DUT topology pull-downmenu in the Basic bar of the Setup tab. The traces and windows are allocated automatically according
to the DUT topology.
If the DUT topology is changed, the calibration and deskew data will be cleared. Recalibration becomes
necessary before an accurate measurement or analysis. If the calibration data is hoped to be held,
save the state in time and recall it when required.

10.5.2 DUT Length
The DUT length means the time that the signal takes to transmit through the DUT or reflect the incident
plane and is required to show the time-domain responses of DUT in full. The sweep frequency spanand points of the channel are set according to the DUT length, and the span of the transformation is
automatically calculated by the DUT length when the time domain traces are set in the time axes. It's
not recommended to change the sweep settings by other methods.

www.siglent.com

187

SNA6000A User Manual

Figure 10-10-7 DUT Length measure wizard

In addition to the Setup wizard, the DUT length can be set in the DUT Length textbox in the Basic barof the Setup tab. It's a convenient way to set the suitable value by measuring the DUT length in the
DUT Length dialog. Click the Auto button on the left of the textbox to open the dialog, connect the
DUT according to the picture and instructions in the dialog, click the Measure button and wait for themark to appear, click the Finish button to close the dialog, and finish the DUT length setting. If themeasurement result is out of the default range, an information dialog will pop up to notify the users thatthe DUT length will be set to the maximum or minimum.

10.5.3 Stimulus Magnitude in Time Domain
The stimulus magnitude in the time domain can be set in the Stim. Ampl. textbox in the Basic bar of
the Setup tab, which defines the magnitude of the impulse or step stimulus signal for the timedomain responses of the traces under the format Volt.

10.5.4 Port Impedance
The port impedance can be set in the Ref. Z textbox in the More Function bar of the Setup tab,which defines the reference impedance to calculate the impedance values of the traces under the188

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual
format Impedance.

10.5.5 Velocity Factor & Dielectric Constant
The velocity factor is the ratio of the velocity of the electric signal in the DUT to that in the vacuum.
VNAs calculate the distances by the transmission or reflection time based on this factor, which provides
the accurate positions of the impedance discontinuities. There is a functional relationship between thevelocity factor and the dielectric constant of the materials. When either is changed, the other will becalculated by the equation below:

Velocity Factor =1√𝐷𝑖𝑒𝑙𝑒𝑐𝑡𝑟𝑖𝑐 𝐶𝑜𝑛𝑠𝑡𝑎𝑛𝑡

The velocity factor and dielectric constant can be set in the Velocity Factor and Dielectric Const.
textboxes in the More Function bar of the Setup tab.

10.5.6 Power Level
The power level is the power of the test signal transmitted to the DUT, which can be set in the Source
Power spinbox in the More Function bar of the Setup tab.

10.5.7 Average
The average function means that the final measure results are equal to the average of the measure
results in the several sweeps in the same setting, and the number of sweeps needed depends on the
averaging factor. The average function can decrease the random errors to some degree, but slow down
the update of trace data. It's necessary to keep the characteristics and connection of the DUT
unchanged during an average sweep.
To enable or disable the average function, click the Averaging checkbox in the Average tar of the
Setup tab. The average factor can be set in the textbox to the right of the checkbox.

www.siglent.com

189

SNA6000A User Manual

Figure 10-10-8 Avg/BW setting

10.5.8 IF Bandwidth
The IF bandwidth is the bandwidth of the intermediate-frequency filters in the receivers. A narrow IF
bandwidth leads to lower trace noise levels and longer sweep times.
The IF bandwidth can be set in the IF Bandwidth textbox in the Average tar of the Setup tab.

10.5.9 Trigger Mode
The trigger mode gates the channel sweep state change when the trigger signal is detected. The
trigger mode Hold/Stop means that sweep can't be started even if the trigger signal is detected.
Single means that only one sweep is triggered by the trigger signal. Upon sweep completion, thetrigger mode is set to Hold/Stop. Continuous/Run means that the trigger signal starts andcontinuously sweeps.
To switch the trigger mode to Continuous/Run, click the Run button at the top of the TDR toolbar. To
switch the trigger mode to Single, click the Stop/Single button at the top of the TDR toolbar.

10.6 TDR Trace Setup
Without taking the set coupling into account, the settings as follows are applied to a single trace. Usually,
the traces in the TDR option are in a time-domain coupling and marker coupling, meaning that thecorrelated settings are applied to all the traces. In addition, there is a set of default trace configurations
for every DUT topology.

10.6.1 Select a Trace
In addition to clicking the trace or trace information bar on the screen, the Trace pull-down menu at

190

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual
the top of the TDR toolbar has the same function.

10.6.2 Scale Management
In the TDR option, there are several automatic scale settings to use, and it is allowed to change thescale or reference value manually.

10.6.2.1 Auto Scale
To apply the automatic scale settings, click the Auto Scale button at the top of the TDR option andclick the suitable option in the pull-down menu. Every option in the menu represents a set of automaticscale settings.
Option X means that the horizontal axis of the current trace is set automatically. For the traces in thetime domain, the scale and reference value are calculated by the DUT length. For the traces in thefrequency domain, the horizontal axis is set to the frequency sweep setting of the channel.
Option Y means that the vertical axis of the current trace is set automatically. The scale and reference
value are calculated by the maximum and minimum of the trace data.
Option X&Y means that the horizontal and vertical axes of the current traces are set automatically.
The method is the same as introduced above.
All Trace means that the horizontal and vertical axes of all the traces are set automatically. The
method is the same as introduced above.

10.6.2.2 Manual Scale Setup
Manual calibration Settings are implemented through the Scale setting option in the TDR menu.
Horizontal is used to set the Horizontal coordinate and the reference point position, Vertical is used
to set the Vertical coordinate and the reference value. Users click the corresponding edit box to enterthe value through the number button on the front panel.

Figure 10-10-9 Scale Setup by manualwww.siglent.com

191

SNA6000A User Manual
The vertical axis of the traces in the frequency domain has no concern with the sweep setting of thechannel, only to set the displayed span of the trace data.

10.6.3 Memory Trace Management
Memory trace management is in the Data/Mem pull-down menu at the top of the TDR toolbar. Clickthe Data->Mem order in the menu, and the current trace data is saved to the memory trace. Other
orders in the menu are display modes of the data trace and the memory trace for the current trace:
The option Off means the data trace and the memory trace are invisible. The option Memory means
only the memory trace shows in the window. The option Data means only the data trace shows. The
option Data&Mem means both of them are visible.

10.6.4 Measure Parameter & Format
The measurement parameters and formats of the traces can be set in the Parameter tar of the
TDR/TDT tab.
The physical significance of measurement parameters and formats in the frequency domain is thesame as the general parameters of the VNA. In the time domain, T parameters are used asmeasurement parameters, meaning that the ratio of the magnitudes of the response signals received
to the stimulus signals when a unit step / impulse stimulus signal is transmitted to DUT at time zero,in a span. For a specified DUT, S parameters are functions of the signal frequency, while T
parameters are functions of the time under a specified stimulus type. T parameters show the unit
step / impulse response of the DUT, which is of vital importance in the time domain system analysis.

Figure 10-10-10 measure parameter setting

The formats of T parameters include Log Mag, Lin Mag, and Real, which are the same as S
parameters; moreover, Impedance and Volt are added. T parameters show the time domain
responses, so the values are always real numbers. In the other words, the imaginary parts arealways zero. Therefore, Imaginary or phase formats aren't provided for T parameters in the TDR

192

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual
option. The magnitude of Log Mag and Lin Mag formats is intrinsically the absolute values of thereal parts of T parameters.
Impedance format is usually used for the reflection T parameters under a unit step stimulus. It
calculates the impedance value of each point in the signal transmitting path by the reflection T
parameters (reflection coefficients) under the unit step stimulus, which is on the base of the port
impedance. The distances are calculated by the delay of transmission and the velocity factor. In the
Impedance format, the positions and properties of impedance discontinuities in the DUT are shownon the traces visually, which provides a piece of important information for fault detection and removal.
In the Impedance format, the TDR option regards the T parameters as the reflection coefficients ρ,and calculates the impedance by the equation as follow:

Volt format means the trace shows the time domain waveform of the response signal received under
the specified stimulus. The magnitude of the stimulus signal is defined by the value in the Stim.
Ampl. textbox in the Basic bar of the Setup tab. Intrinsically, the Volt format means the trace data is
a product of the T parameters and the magnitude of the stimulus signal.
Click the measure parameter button in the grids on the left of the Parameter bar, the measurement
parameter of the current trace switches to the corresponding parameter. To switch on or off the time
domain transform of the current trace, click the pull-down menu in the left of the Measure line. To
switch to balance or unbalance parameters, click the pull-down menu in the right of the Measure line.
To change the format, click the Format pull-down menu.

10.6.5 Stimulus in Time Domain
The stimulus type can be set in the Stimulus pull-down menu in the Parameter bar of the TDR/TDT
tab. There are two stimulus types to choose: The option Lowpass Step means T parameters show
the unit step responses and the option Lowpass Impulse means T parameters show the unit
impulse responses.
The rise time or impulse width of the stimulus signal can be set in the Rise Time or Impulse Width
textbox. Intrinsically, it controls the beta value of the Kaiser window function applied in the time
domain transformation to weaken the sidelobes. Because the transformation is based on the finite
frequency domain data, the data truncation at the end of frequency domain data leads to someproblems, such as the extension of the rise time or impulse width of the responses signal and theappearance of sidelobes, which is called "truncation effect". Applying the Kaiser window lowers thewww.siglent.com

193

SNA6000A User Manual
sidelobe levels, but aggravates the extension of the rise time or impulse width and brings down the
resolution ratio of transformation. The longer the rise time or impulse width of the stimulus signal, thelarger the beta value of the Kaiser window function, the stronger effects explained above are
introduced into the transformation.

10.6.6 Smoothing
The smoothing function makes the trace data smooth by replacing the original trace data with theaverage of the data nearby. If the local change ratios of trace data are relatively large, the smoothingleads to large data errors. Therefore, the smoothing function is available for the traces whose
measure parameters are reflection S parameters.
To switch on or off the smoothing function, click the Smoothing checkbox in the Parameter bar of
the TDR/TDT tab.

10.6.7 Trace Allocation
The TDR option will delete all existing traces and windows, allocate all the traces and windows
automatically for the DUT topology, and set the traces to default settings if the trace allocation
function is activated. The operation deletes all original traces and their settings, but the channel
settings remain. There are three allocation methods to choose from: The option Mixed means thatthe traces in the time and frequency domain are allocated. The option All T means that only traces inthe time domain are allocated. The option All S means only traces in the frequency domain. Notethat in Single-ended 1 Port topology, only the option Mixed is available.
To use the trace allocation function, click the button of the corresponding method in the Allocation
box in the Trace Control bar of the TDR/TDT tab.

Figure 10-10-11 Trace Control Tab

194

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual

10.6.8 Trace Setup Coupling
In the TDR/TDT Tab of TDR, users can select the Coupling box of the Scale, Marker, or Gating menu
option to enable Time domain setting coupling, Marker coupling, or Gate coupling for traces.

10.6.9 Time Domain Gating
The time-domain gating function transforms the time domain response into the frequency domain
after removing a part of the response. Usually, the function is used to simulate the expected
frequency domain response after removing some faults by removing the abnormal responses
resulting from the impedance discontinuities. The operation procedure includes enabling the time
domain transformation, setting the parameter to remove partial time-domain responses, observing
the other traces in the frequency domain whose gating settings are coupled with the trace, or close
the time domain transformation to observe the frequency responses.
The time-domain gating settings in the TDR option can be changed in the Gating bar of the
TDR/TDT tab.

Figure 10-10-12 TDR Gating Tab
To switch on or off the time domain gating function, click the Gating checkbox.
To change the function type of the gating range, click the ratio button in the Type box. The option
Notch means that the responses in the gating range will be ignored, while the option Bandpass
means that the responses beyond the gating range will be ignored.
The scroll-wheel and textbox can be used to change the start and stop position of the time domain
gating range.

www.siglent.com

195

SNA6000A User Manual

10.6.10 DC Value
Description
In time-domain low-pass pulse and step transformation modes, users can choose to use theautomatic extrapolation function provided by the instrument to determine the DC component value, or
customize the extrapolation value.

DC Value Setting:
Entry: TDR → TDR/TDT → DC
Auto Extrapolate Switch: (Auto Extrapolate) Used to turn on or off the automatic extrapolation
processing of the instrument.
User Manual Entry: Users can manually enter custom DC values or click on the Extrapolate button
to obtain the values extrapolated by the instrument based on the latest data. In addition, the UI also
provides convenient input of Open, Short, and Load configuration values, allowing users to freely
choose appropriate extrapolation values based on the DUT type.

10.7 TDR Data Analysis & Output
The general marker search function is available in the TDR option for data analysis, and there aresome shortcuts provided at the top of TDR toolbar for marker management and search for
maximum/minimum with tracking. In addition, the functions of the rise time search and delta time
search are introduced as the time domain trace data analysis tools in the TDR option.
To correct the errors of impedance calculation resulting from the complicated distribution of
mismatches in the DUT, a peeling algorithm is introduced to reveal the actual impedance value of
every point on the passive DUTs.
The shortcuts to save/recall the state files, output the trace data to the files, and save the screenshot
are provided in the File pull-down menu at the top of the TDR toolbar.

196

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual

10.7.1 Marker Setup
In addition to the general ways to manage the markers in the VNA, the Marker pull-down menu at the
top of the TDR toolbar is a way to add or delete markers.
The order in the first group of the Marker Search pull-down menu is shortcuts to manage thecommon marker tracking marker. The option Off closes the search function of the current marker,
while the Max or Min starts the tracking search for maximum or minimum.

10.7.2 Rise Time Search
Rise time search is only available for the trace in the time domain, which searches for the rising or
falling edge, sets a label to the start and stop, and displays the transition type and time at the top left
corner of the window if successful. It's a tracking search, the results update if the trace data changes.
To switch on or off the rise time search, click the Rise Time (10-90%) or Rise Time (20-80%) option
in the Marker Search pull-down menu. Selecting the suitable search type depends on therequirements.

10.7.3 Delta Time Search
Delta time search is only available for the trace in the time domain, which searches for the difference
between the time where two traces rise or fall to a specified relative level in respective transitionedge. If successful, a label will be set to the relative level on both traces, and the results will be
displayed at the top left corner of the window that contains the start trace of the search. It's a tracking
search, the results update if the trace data changes.
Click the △Time... order in the Marker Search pull-down menu to open the △Time dialog, and thesettings of delta time search can be changed here.
Click the Trace (Start) pull-out menu to change the start trace of the search, click the Trace (Stop)pull-out menu to change the stop trace. A trace in the time domain can start one search at most as astart trace, while it's allowed that more than one searches set the same trace as the stop trace.
The target relative level of the search can be set in the Position (%) textbox in the dialog.
To switch on or off the search, click the △Time Enable checkbox.

www.siglent.com

197

SNA6000A User Manual

10.7.4 PeelingIf there are two or more impedance mismatches on the DUT, a part of the incident wave is reflected
at the first mismatch, the incident energy arriving at the next mismatch reduces, so the reflection at
the next mismatch might seem weaker than that in reality. Calculating impedance using reflection
coefficients might lead to obvious errors after the first mismatch. To avoid the effect of the masking
phenomena explained above, a new approach to calculate impedance, called the peeling algorithm,
is introduced in the TDR option. The algorithm divides the DUT into many sections, calculates the
impedance of the next section by the impedance of the last section as the reference value, and theincident and reflected energy in reality.
The algorithm presupposes that the energy sum of input equals that of output at any points on thepath the signal transmits through, which means that the signal transmits through the DUT without
loss. This is an imperfection of the algorithm, and transmission loss always decreases the accuracy.
Because of the recurrence method in the algorithm, the accuracy also decreases with the distanceincreases.
If the peeling function is enabled, the TDR option calculates impedance in the way explained above,instead of the traditional way. The function is available only if the format of the trace is Impedance ofthe reflection T parameters. To switch on or off the function, click the Peeling checkbox in the
Parameter bar of the TDR/TDT tab.

10.7.5 File & Data Output
In the File pull-down menu at the top of the TDR toolbar, there are some shortcuts for file operationand data output.
The order Save State... is used to save the current state and calibration data as a ..CSA file, andRecall State... is used to restore them from the files.
The order Save Trc Data... is used to save the current trace data to .CSV file, and Save SnP... saves
all available S parameters data as an .SNP file whose format depends on the DUT topology.
Screenshot... is used to save the screenshot as a .PNG file.

198

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual

10.8 Eye Diagram Simulation
10.8.1 Overview
Eye diagrams are used to analyze the influence of the intersymbol interference and noise ontransmission performance, which is an important tool for signal integrity analysis. The eye diagram
simulation function, included with the TDR option, is built on a virtual digital signal generator and thefrequency characteristics of the DUT. It simulates that a virtual input digital signal transmits throughthe DUT, and analyzes the output signal to get an eye diagram. This is different from the traditional
way of using an oscilloscope to draw eye diagrams. There is no need to provide an external digital
signal to the input port of the DUT. To simulate different input signals, change the stimulus settings in
the eye diagram module.

Figure 10-10-13 Eye/Mask Tab

The data analysis of eye diagrams in the option will try to get the numerical characteristics of the
diagram and mark them on the diagram if required, which is designed to help the users obtain the
key information quickly.
The jitter injection and statistical eye diagram function are provided to analyze the influence of thejitter in the input signal on the transmission performance.
The mask test on the eye diagram and preinstalled mask patterns are a convenient method of
estimating whether the eye diagram meets the design requirements.
To start an eye diagram simulation after completing the simulation settings, click the Draw Eye buttonin the Trigger box of the Eye/Mask tab.

10.8.2 Stimulus Bit Pattern
There are 3 bit pattern types to choose in the option: Pseudo-Random Binary Sequence (PRBS),
K28.5 comma code, and the user's bit pattern.

www.siglent.com

199

SNA6000A User Manual
For more information about PRBS, refer to the section Bit Pattern Length. K28.5 comma code isdefined in an industry-standard developed by IBM which includes comma (control) characters. The
user's bit pattern is imported from the user-defined files. The introduces of the bit pattern types in thetable as follow:
Type
PRBS

Bit Pattern Length
Depends on the users,
limited in 2n-1, n = 3,5,7,9,11,13,15

Generator
Generated by a virtual PRBS generator

K28.5

20

“00111110101100000101” (20 bits)

User

limited between 2 and 8192

Imported from a user-defined file

10.8.2.1 Bit Pattern TypeTo change the input bit pattern types, click the Type pull-down menu in the Stimulus box of theEye/Mask tab.
The option Statistical in the menu is used to switch on the statistical eye diagram mode, whichcannot change the bit pattern types for the normal eye diagram simulation.

10.8.2.2 Bit Pattern Length
The bit pattern length of K28.5 code is 20 bits, and that of the user pattern depends on the text in the
file. Only the length of PRBS can be changed in the eye diagram simulation module by clicking theLength pull-down menu in the Stimulus box.
A set of Linear Feedback Shift Register (LFSR) is simulated to generate virtual PRBS, whose
maximum period is selected to equal the bit pattern length. The maximum of the period of PRBS,
generated in a set of LFSR of n level, is 2n-1. In the other words, in ideal conditions, the sequence
will iterate all possible binary numbers of n bits. The initial condition of the LFSR is random, PRBS
generated becomes random to find the worst bit pattern of n bits for transmission performance. Eye
diagram simulation always includes all n-bit input patterns to show the worst transmission
performance of DUT, if PRBS is set as the input signals. So it's recommended to use PRBS as a bit
pattern to draw eye diagrams.
The bit pattern length of PRBS is limited in 2n-1, and n = 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15. That means the bit
pattern will be generated by LFSR of n level, to include the worst condition as far as possible. The
larger length is selected, the degree of the simulation perfection for intersymbol interference
becomes better, but running time becomes longer.

200

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual
10.8.2.3 User Pattern
If the eye diagram is required to simulate the specific bit pattern as the input signal, select the option
USER in the Type pull-down menu, and click the User Pattern button to open the Bit pattern Editor
dialog to set the user-defined pattern. In the dialog, you can load .txt files to import the text as the bit
pattern and edit the bit pattern in the textbox. Close the dialog after loading or saving the bit patternfile, the pattern will be used for the next eye diagram simulation.
The text file to load must contain 0 and 1, but any other characters; and the length of text must be
between 2 and 8192.

10.8.3 Stimulus Signal Setup
10.8.3.1 Logic Level
To change the logic level of the input signal, set the value in the One Lv. or Zero Lv. textbox in the
Stimulus box.

10.8.3.2 Data Rate
The data rate of the signal is the number of bits transmitted per second, which reflects the basefrequency of the signal. Considering the lowpass characteristics of transmission systems in reality,
the transmission becomes bad with a large data rate, and the signal integrity analysis becomes
important.
To change the data rate of the input signal, set the value in the Data Rate textbox in the Stimulusbox.

10.8.3.3 Rise TimeThe rise time of the signal reflects the steepness of the transition edge. The smaller rise time means
the higher degree of steepness, the larger proportion of high-frequency parts, and the more serious
high-frequency losses can be during transmission. It's effective to widen the eye by reducing the risetime properly. But too small a rise time leads to ringing phenomena at the logic level of the output
signal, resulting in the decrease of the eye height.
To change the rise time type or value of the input signal, operate the Rise Time pull-down menu or
textbox in the Stimulus box.

www.siglent.com

201

SNA6000A User Manual

10.8.4 Eye Diagram Analysis
During the eye diagram simulation, the option analyzes the eye diagram automatically and try to get
the numerical characteristics as follow: Rise Time, Fall Time, Jitter, Crossing Percent, Opening
Factor, The Ratio of Signal to Noise, Duty Cycle Distortion, Level One, Level Zero, Level Mean,
Amplitude, Height, Width. And Rise Time, Fall Time, Jitter (peak-peak value), Amplitude,
Height, Width are allowed to be marked on the eye diagram to conveniently obtain thecharacteristics of the eye diagram.

10.8.4.1 Analysis Result Overlay
To switch on or off the data analysis markers on the diagram, click the Overlay checkbox in the
Result bar.

10.8.4.2 Rise Time in Data Analysis
To change the rise time type for data analysis of eye diagrams, click the Rise Time Def. pull-downmenu in the Result bar.

10.8.5 Eye Diagram Scale Management
By default, the eye diagram is displayed in the automatic scale settings, which show the details asclearly as possible. They can also be manually changed.
The scale settings in the vertical axis can be changed manually. But those in the horizontal axis
depend on the data rate of the input signal, which can't be changed after the simulation starts.
To switch to a scale setting mode, click the Auto Scale or Manual radio button in the Scale/Maskbar.
To change the scale or offset values in Manual scale mode, set the value in the Scale/Div or Offset
textbox. The Offset value here is the value that the center vertical scale line refers to.

Figure 10-10-14 Eye/Mask setting

202

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual

10.8.6 Mask Test for Eye Diagram
Mask patterns are some areas where the eye diagram is forbidden to pass, which transfer the design
requirements of the transmission systems into the numerical characteristics of eye diagrams. They
usually rule the tolerance of logic 0, 1 level and rise or fall time. If the eye diagram passes throughthe areas, the TDR option judges that the eye diagram can't meet the requirement, leading to thefailure of the mask test. According to different communication standards, or at the different nodes in acommunication system, different mask patterns should be applied. The first step to mask test is toselect or design a suitable mask pattern based on the requirements.
To select or change the mask pattern applied, click the Mask Pattern button in the Scale/Mask bar
to open the Mask Pattern dialog.
In the File tab of the dialog, preinstalled standard patterns or user-defined mask files (.MSK format)
can be loaded. In the Scale tab, the Margin of the mask, start Position of a bit, Delta time of a bit,and Logic Level can be set in textboxes. In the Edit tab, the positions of vertices in the mask pattern
can be changed by set values in the textboxes. Dragging the vertices in the left window also makes
sense, but it's recommended to drag with a mouse connected to the VNA, because the points may
be too close together for easy entry using touch operation.
Close the dialog after saving the modifications to a mask file, the new pattern will be applied to thenext mask test.
To switch on or off the mask test, click the Mask Test checkbox in the Scale/Mask bar.

10.8.7 Jitter & Statistical Eye Diagram
Jitter is the transient deviation from the corresponding ideal position of a signal over successive
trigger events. High jitter worsens the transmission performance. It's divided into the Deterministic
Jitter (DJ) and the Random Jitter (RJ). RJ is generated by some unpredictable factors and isindependent of the input bit patterns. The models for RJ usually have a Gaussian distribution, andthe magnitudes are represented in root mean square (RMS) values. DJ is generated by some
repeatable and predictable factors and usually has a finite magnitude value. The jitter related to the
input bit patterns in DJ is called the Data Dependent Jitter (DDJ), while the other jitter in DJ is called
the Periodic Jitter (PJ).
To change the settings of the jitter injection, click the Advanced Waveform button in the Stimulus
box of the Eye/Mask tab, or click the buttons in the Adv Waveform bar of the Setup tab, to open the
Advanced Waveform dialog. Click the Jitter button at the top of the dialog to switch to enter the jittersetting interface.

www.siglent.com

203

SNA6000A User Manual

Figure 10-10-15 Eye jitter setting

To change the jitter type injected into the input signal, click the Random or Periodic ratio button in
the Type box. To set the jitter parameters, set the values in the corresponding textboxes.
To select the jitter magnitude units, click the Jitter Unit pull-down menu. The unit UI means that thetime difference value between the zero time of two adjacent transition edges in the signal, which isthe default jitter magnitude unit.
To set the probability limit to display in the statistical eye diagram, click the Display Limit pull-downmenu. If the probability of the signal appearing is lower than the display limit, it will be ignored and set
to zero in the statistical eye diagrams.
To switch on the jitter injection for the next simulation after completing the jitter settings, click the
Enable checkbox in the jitter setting interface. When the jitter injection function is switched on, thestatistical eye diagram mode is enabled at the same time, the input bit pattern type is switched to
Statistical.
To switch to the statistical eye diagram mode in manual, select the option Statistical in the Type pulldown menu in the Stimulus box. In the statistical mode, the input bit pattern is set to PRBS with afixed length, so the statistical eye diagrams might be slightly different in several simulations of thesame settings. The probabilities are represented by colors in the statistical eye diagrams: Warmcolors indicate a large probability, red represents the largest ones; cold colors indicate a small
probability, with deep blue representing the smallest values.

204

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual

10.9 TDR Advanced Waveform Function
The Advanced waveform function is applied in both modules of the TDR option, TDR/ TDT analysis,
and eye diagram simulation, which includes viewpoint setting, emphasis/ de-emphasis, deembedding, and Continuous Time Linear Equalization (CTLE).
The corresponding settings in the Advanced Waveform dialog, which can be opened by clicking the
buttons in the Adv Waveform bar of the Setup tab or the Advanced Waveform button in the
Stimulus box of the Eye/Mask tab.
To switch the dialog to the interface for setting the specified function, click the corresponding button
at the top of the dialog.

10.9.1 View point
To switch the viewpoint of the waveform to stimulus or responses, click the corresponding View ratio
button at the top of the dialog.
Click the ratio button before the DUT icon, switch the viewpoint to stimulus, and the trigger mode is
set to Hold /Stop, the transmission parameters show the stimulus signal only processed byemphasis /de-emphasis, which is the signal transmitted to the DUT. Setting the trigger mode toContinuous /Run, the viewpoint will be set to responses automatically.
Click the ratio button after the DUT icon, switch the viewpoint to responses, and set the trigger modeto Continuous /Run. The transmission parameters show the responses processed by emphasis /deemphasis, DUT, and equalization.

10.9.2 Emphasis/De-emphasis
Because of the lowpass characteristics of transmission systems, the high-frequency components inthe signal have higher losses than those at lower frequencies and the phenomenon becomes more
serious as the transmission distance increases. The phenomenon is the main contributor to signal
distortion during transmission. To control this distortion, the emphasis /de-emphasis technology isintroduced to compensate for these additional losses by increasing the relative levels before thetransmission. Transition edges in the time domain represent high-frequency components in thefrequency domain. Emphasis /De-emphasis technology is designed to increase the level variation of
the edges by adjusting the levels of the bits close to the edges. The parameters to adjust the levels of
the first bit before or after the edges, and those for the two bits after the edges, are provided in the
TDR option and are defined as Pre Cursor, Post 1 Cursor, Post 2 Cursor. By changing thesewww.siglent.com

205

SNA6000A User Manualparameters, it's easy to simulate the influence of the different emphasis/de-emphasis strategies on
the transmission performance in eye diagram simulations.

Figure 10-10-16 Emphasis setting

To change the parameters, set the value in the textbox in the Emphasis interface, and click the
Enable checkbox to enable the function. The function is available in transmission parameters
measurement and eye diagram simulations.

10.9.3 De-embedding
The TDR option provides a port de embedding function, which is the same as the port de embedding
function in the fixture measurement function.
By clicking the Enable button on the left side of the De embedding tab, the TDR option port deembedding function main switch can be turned on/off.

206

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual

Figure 10-10-17
Then, select the port to be de embedded through the port in the image or the radio box on the right,
click the Load button to load the SNP file that records the embedded network characteristics, andclick the Enable checkbox on the right to enable the de embedding function on the selected port.

10.9.4 Equalization
To control the signal distortion resulting from the additional loss of high-frequency signal components,
equalization technology is introduced to amplify the high-frequency parts properly after receiving thesignal to balance the loss over various frequency spans. A high-pass filter and a continuous-timelinear equalizer (CTLE) can be implemented. The CTLE simulation function in the TDR option allows
the user to adjust the system function of the equalizer, to simulate the effect of the equalization on
the transmission performance in eye diagram simulations.

Figure 10-10-18 Equalization setting

www.siglent.com

207

SNA6000A User Manual
The equalizer system function provided by the TDR option is as follows:; By adjusting the DC gain
and zero pole position, the system function of the equalizer can be modified to simulate and evaluate
different linear equalization strategies.

H(s) =

K(s + ωz )(s + ωp1 )(s + ωp2 )The TDR option also provides a solution to describe the characteristics of the equalizer using thefrequency response recorded in the CSV file: The TDR option simulates the equalizer using thefrequency response recorded in the CSV file, The response value of the equalizer at the scanningfrequency is obtained using amplitude phase linear interpolation method (when it exceeds thefrequency range recorded in the file, the response value at the minimum frequency is taken when it isless than the minimum frequency, and the response value at two frequencies from low to high istaken when it is greater than the maximum frequency). The file format can refer to the following
examples:!SIGLENT Technologies!VNA TDR-option Equalization File
# Hz dB
1000000000,-1.53E+01,-3.27E-01
2000000000,-1.52E+01,-7.34E+01
3000000000,-1.03E+01,-8.63E+01
4000000000,-9.88E+00,-1.00E+02

Notes:
1. The data format is indicated by the line starting with "#" (the data format is not case sensitive),with the first data in each line being the frequency, and the last two data representing the response
value (complex) of the equalizer at that frequency. If the second data of the response value isomitted, the default value is zero. Support the following data formats to express frequency response.
If the format description is omitted, the default is MA:
DB: The previous data represents the frequency response amplitude in logarithmic form, while
the latter data represents the phase of the response in angular format.
MA: The previous data represents the amplitude of the frequency response, while the latter data
represents the phase of the response (angle based).
RI: The previous data represents the real part of the response value, while the latter data
represents the imaginary part of the response value.

208

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual
2. The comment should start with '!' and ignore the comment content when reading.
3. The frequency is required to be arranged in ascending order. If the frequency of a row is lower
than the previous row, the data in that row will be ignored.
4. The frequency response recorded in the file should include at least 2 frequency points, but not
more than 10000 frequency points.

Set the relevant parameters through the fine-tuning box in the Equalization tab, or load a CSV file,select the radio box in the Type box on the left to describe the characteristics of the simulation
equalizer, and select whether to enable the equalization function through the Enable check box on
the left. This function is only effective for transmission parameter measurement and eye graphsimulation.

10.10 Hot TDR
10.10.1 Overview
When conducting measurements, VNA usually assumes that the zero input response of the DUT is
zero. That is to say, assuming that all signals received by the port receiver are triggered by test
signals sent by the port transmitter to the DUT; The signal received by a receiver at a certain port
should be equal to the sum of the signal vectors transmitted and reflected by the test signals sent by
the transmitters at each port on the DUT to reach that port. According to the above assumption, VNA
obtains the response generated by the test signal excitation at each port through measurement, andcalculates the S parameter matrix of the DUT based on this.

If the zero input response of the DUT is not zero, when using VNA measurement, the signal received
by the port receiver is equal to the vector sum of the response caused by the test signal sent by VNA
and the zero input response of the device. Based on this, calculating the S parameter may result insignificant errors. Therefore, such interference may reduce the accuracy of VNA measurement andcan be suppressed in some cases.

If the zero input response amplitude of the DUT is small, the VNA power level can be appropriately
increased without damaging the equipment and DUT, and the response amplitude caused by the
VNA test signal can be increased, which can have a certain inhibitory effect on such interference.

www.siglent.com

209

SNA6000A User Manual
If the zero input response of DUT obeys some statistical law, and the mean value in the time domain
is zero (such as obeying Normal distribution); The average function can be enabled and the averagefrequency can be appropriately increased to suppress the impact of such interference on themeasurement by averaging the responses measured multiple times.

If it is necessary to use VNA to measure the device in operation, and the tested device sends a digital
signal with a known data rate to the test port during operation; In this case, the zero input signal of
the DUT is not zero, and using the above method may not achieve good interference suppression
effect. In frequency domain measurement, as interference signals are generally concentrated on a
few frequencies, the impact on the entire frequency domain measurement may not be severe; In the
TDR option, due to the superposition of interference signals in the time domain and actual input
responses, the time-domain measurement results will be severely distorted.

Using the Hot TDR mode in the TDR option to measure such devices can suppress the impact ofsuch interference on time-domain measurements. Due to the fact that VNA always scans several
frequency points during frequency domain measurements to estimate the frequency characteristics of
DUT within the testing frequency range; When the scanning frequency point coincides with thefrequency of the interference signal, the test results at that frequency point will be affected byinterference. In Hot TDR mode, VNA will search for scanning frequency settings to avoid interference
signals based on their data rate, thereby eliminating the impact of interference signals on frequency
domain measurement results.

10.10.2 Usage Guidelines
Before using the Hot TDR mode to measure equipment in operation, it is necessary to ensure thatthe test signal sent by VNA to the equipment does not cause equipment malfunction. Properly selectthe VNA power level to prevent excessive testing signal amplitude from damaging the tested
equipment; Observe the changes in the reflected signal received by VNA during the process of
reducing the power level. If there is a significant change in the reflected signal, the power levelshould be significantly lowered to prevent equipment failure.

When conducting measurements, if it is found that there are peaks in the frequency domain
measurement results with constantly changing amplitudes at some frequencies, the time domain
measurement results will fluctuate severely; It can be determined that the device's own signal output
causes serious interference to time-domain measurement, and Hot TDR can be used to eliminate it.

210

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual

On the right side of the Setup tab on the bottom toolbar of TDR, you can set the Hot TDR mode.
Enter the data rate of the signal emitted by the device in the Data Rate fine-tuning box; If the data
rate of the signal emitted by the device is unknown, an approximate value can be obtained using the
cursor on the frequency measurement results. The data rate error should be less than ± 0.5% toprevent failure in searching for scan frequencies that avoid interference.

Then, click on the "Avoidance Spurious" button and click "Yes" in the pop-up dialog box; VNA will
check whether the current scan is affected by interference and search for scan frequency settings to
avoid interference signals after confirming interference. If no interference is detected with the current
scanning frequency, it will prompt that the interference signal has not been detected and continue to
use the current scanning frequency setting for measurement. If a suitable scanning frequency is notfound, it will prompt that a suitable scanning setting has not been found; This may be due to incorrect
input data rates or excessive frequency components of interference signals, making it difficult tocompletely eliminate them. If the search is successful, the TDR option will enable the Hot TDR modeand use the scan frequency found for measurement. When the Hot TDR mode is enabled, the Avoid
Spurious button will change to the Close Hot TDR button, which is used to turn off the Hot TDRmode; A markwill appear on the right side of the button indicating that the Hot TDR mode isenabled.

After enabling the Hot TDR mode, due to changes in the original scanning frequency setting,recalibration may be necessary to obtain more accurate measurement results. In addition, after
changing the DUT length or scanning frequency setting in Hot TDR mode, the original Hot TDR
setting becomes invalid and may need to be reconfigured to eliminate the influence of interference
signals.

Figure 10-19 Hot TDR setting

www.siglent.com

211

SNA6000A User Manual

11 Spectrum Analyzer
11.1 Overview
Spectrum Analysis function is based on the VNA hardware, by adjusting the local oscillator signal andmirror suppression algorithm processing to obtain the signal spectrum, so as to achieve spectrum
analysis function.

11.2 User Interface

A.

Active Entry

B.

Indicate the main working state of state, the port of RF input, Attenuation mode, Average Type,
Current Marker operation.

C. Display the SA setting dialog box, SA parameter reset, SA processing flow chart
D. SA Measurement items.
E.

Indicate and control the main sweep parameters, such as frequency, resolution.

F.

Status bar.

212

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual

11.3 Create a Spectrum Analysis Channel
Option SA must be enabled.
Press [Meas] > S-Params > Mode > SA, The SA channel selection dialog box will display after the SA
measurement mode was selected. Select “Active Channel” (delete the existing measurement) or“New Channel” then click OK. A Spectrum Analysis measurement is displayed on the current channel
or on a new channel and New Window.

Figure 11-11-1 SA mode channel selection dialog box
In the interface of the SA channel selection dialog box, the “show setup dialog” check box is selectedby default. when user clicks “OK”, a SA Setup dialog box will be displayed that can set relatedparameters. As figure shown below:

www.siglent.com

213

SNA6000A User Manual

Figure 11-2 SA Setup dialog box
If the show Setup Dialog check box is deselected, the SA Setup dialog box will not be displayedwhen the SA function is enabled. If the user wants to modify the SA parameters, there are two ways
to enter the SA Setup dialog box.
⚫

Press [Sweep] > Sweep > SA Setup… to recall the SA Setup dialog box.

⚫

Press [Power] > Power > SA Setup… to recall the SA Setup dialog box.

11.4 Spectrum Analyzer Settings
The SA Setup dialog box has three tabs: SA Tab, Source Tab and Advanced Tab.
The SA Tab configures the SA frequency range, CF step, sweep points, RBW, VBW, Average type
and RF Input Receiver.
The Source Tab is the configuration of signal parameters when uses the internal source for spectrum
analysis.
The Advanced Tab the configuration of relevant parameters related to signal processing.

214

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual

Figure 11-3 The SA Tab setting interface

11.4.1 SA Setting Tab
SA Tab Setting is mainly related to Spectrum analysis frequency setting. which can be set through the
SA Setup dialog box or by pressing the [Freq] key on the front panel to enter the frequency setting
menu, as the figure shown below. If the frequency is changed, the frequency sweep will restart.

Figure 11-4 [Freq] key to set SA frequency parameters
The frequency range of a channel can be expressed by three parameters: Start Frequency, Center
Frequency and Stop Frequency. If any of the parameters change, the others will be adjusted
automatically in order to ensure the coupling relationship among them:www.siglent.com

215

SNA6000A User Manual

𝑓𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡𝑒𝑟 = (𝑓𝑠𝑡𝑎𝑟𝑡 + 𝑓𝑠𝑡𝑜𝑝 )/2, 𝑓𝑠𝑝𝑎𝑛 = 𝑓𝑠𝑡𝑜𝑝 − 𝑓𝑠𝑡𝑎𝑟𝑡
11.4.1.1 Start Frequency
Set the start frequency of the Spectrum Analyzer. The start frequency and the stop frequency will
display at the bottom of the grid respectively.
⚫

The span and center frequency vary with the start frequency when the Span does not reachthe minimum.

11.4.1.2 Stop Frequency
Set the stop frequency of the Spectrum Analyzer, the start frequency and the stop frequency will
display at the bottom of the grid respectively.
⚫

The span and center frequency vary with the stop frequency.

11.4.1.3 Center Frequency
Set the center frequency of the Spectrum Analyzer.
⚫

Modifying the center frequency will modify both the start frequency and stop frequency when
the span is constant (except when the start frequency or stop frequency reaches theboundary).

11.4.1.4 Span
Set the span of the Spectrum Analyzer. Any changes of the span will restart the sweep.
Pay attention to the following points when set the span:⚫

The start and stop frequency vary with the span when the center frequency is constant.

⚫

The span can be set down to 100 Hz and up to the maximum bandwidth.

⚫

Modifying the span may cause an automatic change in both CF Step Size and RBW if they
are in Auto mode. Besides, the change of RBW may influence VBW (in Auto VBW mode).

⚫

Variation in the Span, RBW or VBW would cause a change in the sweep time.

11.4.1.5 CF Step Size
Setting the value of CF step will change the direction key step of center frequency, start frequency,
stop frequency and frequency offset.
When Auto mode is selected, the Center frequency step Size is 5% of the current span. That is,

𝑓𝐶𝐹 𝑆𝑡𝑒𝑝 = 𝑓𝑆𝑝𝑎𝑛 ∗ 5%. Each press of the ▲|▼ arrows on the front panel or click the up and down sign

216

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manualof the SA Setup’s center box. The center frequency 𝑓𝐶𝐹 𝑆𝑡𝑒𝑝 increases or decreases by the CF stepsize.
When Manual mode is selected, Users can customize the size of CF Step. Each press of the ▲|▼arrows on the front panel or click the up and down sign of the SA Setup’s center box. The center
frequency 𝑓𝐶𝐹 𝑆𝑡𝑒𝑝 increases or decreases by the CF step size.
11.4.1.6 Num of Points
The number of sweep points represents the number of sweep and trace displayed points (201~10001)
More sweep points will improve the resolution of waveform, but also affect the minimum sweep time,and increase the time of data processing and remote access to data, and reduce the response rate.

11.4.2 SA Tab Processing setup
The SA processing setup is to config the signal’s parameters. User can set the parameters via the SA
Setup dialog, or by pressing [AvgBW] > BW to enter the spectrum analysis signal processing
parameters setting menu, as the shown figure below.

Figure 11-5 Spectrum analysis signal processing setup menuwww.siglent.com

217

SNA6000A User Manual
11.4.2.1 RBW
Set the RBW (resolution bandwidth) in order to distinguish between signals which has frequency
components that are near one another.
⚫

Reducing the RBW will increase the frequency resolution. but lead to a longer sweep time
(influenced by both RBW and VBW when the sweep time is in automatic mode).

⚫

RBW varies with the Span/RBW setting in Auto RBW mode.

11.4.2.2 VBW
Set the video bandwidth in order to filter out the noise outside the video band.
⚫

Reducing the VBW will smooth the trace and helps to highlight small signals from noise, but
it will also increase the sweep time (Sweep Time is affected by a combination of RBW and
VBW when it is in Auto mode).

⚫

VBW varies with RBW when it is in Auto mode. While in Manual mode, VBW is not affectedby RBW.

11.4.2.3 Averaging Type
Average type refers to the processing mode of intermediate frequency data in data detection anddisplay detection, which affects the effect of trace average and detection average.

Power
（V^2）
RBW

Voltage

Detect

VBW

Trace

LogPower
Avg Type

Figure 11-6 Flow chart of Average type1.

Log Power
Select the logarithmic (decibel) scale for all filtering and averaging processes. This scale is“Video” because it is the most common display and analysis scale for the video signal within
analyzer. This scale is excellent for finding Sine/CW signals near noise.

2.

Power Average
In this average type, all filtering and averaging processes work on the power (the square of the218

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual
magnitude) of the signal, instead of its log or envelope voltage. This scale is best for real-time
power measurement of complex signals.
3.

Voltage Average
In this Average type, all filtering and averaging processes work on the voltage of the envelope ofthe signal. This scale is suitable for observing rise and fall behavior of AM or pulse-modulated
signals such as radar and TDMA transmitters.

11.4.2.4 RF Input Receiver
Select the receiver port for RF signal input.

11.4.3 Source Tab
The Source Tab of SA Setup is the configuration for internal sources as signal sources.

Figure 11-7 Source Tab
Port Powers Coupled (checked) the power levels are the same at each test port. Set power at any
test port and all test ports change to the same power level.
By default, only one of the multiple ports in VNA can be set as the source port for outputting
excitation signals. For the LO Board>=A9 version of the four port vector network analyzer, two signal
sources are set internally, with port 1 and port 2 sharing the same signal source, and port 3 and port

www.siglent.com

219

SNA6000A User Manual
4 sharing the same signal source. It is possible to output two signals simultaneously, but only one
port corresponding to each signal source can be set as the excitation port. Setting one port as theoutput will turn off the output of the other port of the same source.
SA Source Setup

Figure 11-8 SA Source Setup⚫

State: If the “On” parameter is selected, the port source power is enabled⚫

Type (Sweep):1.

CW: The source is set to a CW frequency.

2.

Linear Freq: The source is set to a power sweep.

3.

Power: The source is set to a power sweep.

4.

LinFreq + Power: The source is set to sweep from the Start to Stop frequency and power
sweep.

⚫

Frequency: Set the sweep Frequency of the source.

⚫

Power: Set the power level of the source.

When the internal source is used for the Spectrum analysis signal sources, the sweep type, source
frequency and the port power level of the source can also be set by pressing the [Power] key on thefront panel to enter the port power setting menu. As the figure shown below:

220

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual

Figure 11-9 Press the [Power] key to enter the source’s setting menu

11.4.4 Advanced Tab
The Advanced Tab is the configuration of parameters related to signal processing for Spectrum
analysis. Which can be set through the SA Setup dialog box or by pressing the [AvgBW] > BW on thefront panel to enter the setting menu, as the figure shown below.

Figure 11-10 Advanced Tab setting menuwww.siglent.com

221

SNA6000A User Manual
11.4.4.1 RBW/VBW
Sets the ratio of Resolution Bandwidth to Video Bandwidth when the Video Bandwidth is in Automode.
11.4.4.2 Span/RBW
Sets the ratio of Span to Resolution Bandwidth when the Resolution Bandwidth is in Auto mode.
11.4.4.3 Image Reject TypeThe signal is mixed with the local oscillator to get an intermediate frequency signal, and the mixer
may produce a mirrored frequency signal. Therefore, it is necessary to change the local oscillator orintermediate frequency to collect multiple groups of spectral data, and filter out the image through theimage suppression algorithm.
None: Selects 1 acquisitions, and mirror suppression is not performed.
Min: Selects 3 acquisitions.
Normal: Selects 4 acquisitions.
Better: Selects 5 acquisitions.
Max: Selects 6 acquisitions.
Note: Only 3 sets of data can be acquisitions at most when the frequency point is below 40MHz.
11.4.4.4 Attenuation mode
Set the maximum power or voltage that can be currently displayed in the trace window. The value isdisplayed at the upper left corner of the screen grid.
The reference level is an important parameter of the spectrum analyzer, which indicates the upper limitof the current dynamic range of the spectrum analyzer. When the energy of the signal to be measured
exceeds the reference level, nonlinear distortion or even overload alarm may be generated. The user
should understand the nature of the signal to be measured and choose the reference level carefully.
The reference level is too large to ensure full utilization of the linear range of the ADC, nor too small to
be higher than the noise of the ADC. By setting a suitable reference level, the best measurement results
can be obtained while protecting the spectrum analyzer.
According to the amplitude of the input signal, the user can set the RF front-end attenuation mode of
the response, which is to avoid the display distortion when the input signal is large and reduce thenoise when the input signal is small.
Input attenuation can be set up to Auto, Low Noise and Standard mode.
⚫

Auto: The attenuation value is automatically adjusted according to the state of preamplifier
and the current reference level.

222

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual⚫

Low noise: The minimum attenuation mode, the average noise level is lower.

⚫

Standard: The maximum attenuation mode, the average noise level is higher.

11.4.5 Trace setup
Click the trace status area on the upper left corner of the interface, and the trace setting drop-downmenu will pop up for trace setting operations.

Figure 11-11 The trace Settings drop-down menu
11.4.5.1 Select Trace
Before operating on the Trace, the user needs to specify and only specify one trace at a time. The
number of the selected trace will appear as selected in the status bar (with a yellow highlighted
border).
11.4.5.2 Trace Type
There are four trace types: Clear/write, Max Hold, Min Hold, Average. Different trace types represent
different processing methods of the trace data of a new frame on the historical frame data:⚫

Clear/write Erases any data previously stored in the selected trace, and display the data
sampled in real-time of each point on the trace. The type identifier is “W”.

⚫

Max Hold Retain the maximum level for each point of the selected trace. Update the data if
a new maximum level is detected in successive sweeps. Max Hold is very effective whenwww.siglent.com

223

SNA6000A User Manual
measuring events that may take successive scans to measure accurately. Some common
applications include FM Deviation, AM NRSC, and frequency hopping or drift. The typeidentifier is “M”.
⚫

Min Hold Display the minimum value from multiple sweeps for each point of the trace andupdate the data if a new minimum is generated in successive sweeps. The type identifier is“m”.

⚫

Average Set the averages times of the selected trace. The type identifier is “A”.

More averages can reduce the noise and the influence of other random signals, thus highlighting thestable signal characteristics. The larger the averages times is, the smoother the trace will be enabling
averaging will take more time to collect the full spectral information because the analyzer needs tosweep the set average count. The displayed data is averaged in a first-in-first-out fashion.

11.4.5.3 Trace State
There are four trace states: active, view, blank, and background. Different trace states indicate therefresh and display states of traces:⚫

Active: Refreshed and displayed trace data.

⚫

View: The trace data will not be refreshed, and the current latest trace will be displayed in a
fixed frame.

⚫

Background: Refreshed trace data but no display.

⚫

Blank: Trace data is no longer refreshed or displayed

11.4.5.4 Detector
The analyzer displays the sweep signal on the screen in the form of a trace. For each trace point, theanalyzer always captures all the data within a specific time interval and processes (Peak, Average,etc.) the data using the detector currently selected, then it displays the processed data (a single data
point) on the screen.
Select an appropriate detector type according to the actual application in order to ensure the accuracyof the measurement
The available types are Positive Peak, Negative Peak, Sample, Normal and Average. The default is
Normal.

224

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual⚫

Positive Peak: For each trace point, Positive Peak detector displays the maximum value ofdata sampled within the corresponding time interval⚫

Negative Peak: For each trace point, Negative Peak detector displays the minimum valueof data sampled within the corresponding time interval.

⚫

Sample: For each trace point, Sample detector displays the transient level corresponding to
the central time point of the corresponding time interval. This detector type is applicable tonoise or noise-like signal.

⚫

Average: For each trace point, Average detector displays the average value of data
sampled within the corresponding time interval.

⚫

Normal: Also known as normal detection or rosenfell detection. Using conventional
detection traces, the trace data is paired in pairs, with odd points displaying the maximum
value at the sampling points and even points displaying the minimum value at the sampling
points. This can intuitively reflect the amplitude range of the signal (background noise), but
due to implementation reasons, there may also be a certain signal frequency deviation

In practical implementation, conventional detection belongs to secondary detection, which uses two
adjacent pairs (a group) of positive and negative peaks for comparison. If the actual signal appears at
an even point position, in order to achieve the display effect of "odd point displays the maximum
value in the sampling point, and even point displays the minimum value in the sampling point", theorder of the data in that group will be reversed, resulting in frequency deviation.
User can manually select an appropriate detection type based on actual requirements and application
scenarios to ensure measurement accuracy, or set the detection type to automatic.

11.5 Spectrum Analysis measurement
11.5.1 Marker → SA
During S parameter measurement, if the user wants to have a quick view of the specific frequency
point’s spectrum, spectrum analysis can be opened by means of Marker → SA. That is to create a new
SA channel in full frequency span based on the S parameters, and a marker is created on the trace atthe same frequency as the S parameter channel marker.
The same receiver that is used for the S parameter channel is used for the SA channel. For example,
if a marker is opened in the S11 channel, a SA measurement is created using the receiver “A” of
port1 after “Marker → SA”.
www.siglent.com

225

SNA6000A User Manual

How to open Marker → SA:
1.

Make an S parameter measurement, such as S44, set the center frequency as 1GHz and Span
as 50MHz. and mark the S44 trace by pressing the [Marker] key on the front panel;

2.

Press [Marker] > Marker Function > Marker → SA to enable the SA function. You can view thefrequency spectrum of 1GHz point of the S44, as figure shown below:

Figure 11-12 Marker → SA

Press [Sweep] > Sweep > SA Setup… can recall the SA Setup dialog box If the user needs tomodify the SA parameter settings.

11.5.2 Channel Power
Measure the power and power density within the specified channel bandwidth. When this function isenable, the span and resolution bandwidth are automatically adjusted to smaller values. Select“Channel Power” and click “Meas Setup” to set the corresponding parameters. The two vertical lines
on the trace perpendicular to the X-axis represent the integration bandwidth. The Y-axis value is set
to the measured power value, and displays on the upper right corner.

226

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual

Figure 11-13 Channel Power measure

11.5.2.1 Integration BW
Set the frequency width of the channel to be tested and the power of the channel is the power
integral within this bandwidth. You can use the numeric keys, knob or direction keys to modify thisparameter.

11.5.2.2 Info Table
When the information table is “On”, click other menu options and the measurement result table will
not be closed. When the status of the information table is “Off”, the measurement result informationtable will be closed
Channel power measurement results include: Channel power and power spectral density.
The measurement of the specified channel power is centered on the central frequency point of thechannel, and the frequency Span of the test channel is adjusted. The channel power is the integral ofthis frequency span, and the bandwidth of the specified channel is called the integral bandwidth. The
value of the integral bandwidth is related to Span but ≤ Span.
⚫

Channel Power: Power within the integration bandwidth.

www.siglent.com

227

SNA6000A User Manualstop

chPow = ∑ (
start

watt
) ∗ (itgBW/(stop − start))
rbw

chPow : Channel power, in watts
start, stop : The start and stop frequency of channel.
watt : Absolute power converted from sweep point data, in watts
rbw : resolution bandwidth
itgBW : integration bandwidth.

⚫

Power Spectral Density: Power (in dBm/Hz) normalized to 1Hz within the integration bandwidth

nspd = chPow/itgBW
nspd : Power Spectral Density
itgBW : Integration bandwidth.

11.5.3 ACPR
Measure the power of the main channel and adjacent channels as well as the power difference
between the main channel and each of the adjacent channels. When this function is enabled, thespan and resolution bandwidth of the analyzer are adjusted to smaller values automatically. Select
ACPR and click “Meas Setup” to set the corresponding parameters.
The main channel and the left and right adjacent channels are specified, the main channel iscentered on the central frequency point, and the left and right adjacent channels are symmetric withrespect to the main channel. Channel parameters can be changed by setting the bandwidth of the
primary channel, the bandwidth of the neighboring channel, and the interval between the neighboring
channel and the center point of the primary channel. The power of each channel is calculated by thesame method as the channel power algorithm. The ratio of the power of the adjacent channel to thepower of the main channel is the ratio of the power of the adjacent channel.

228

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual

Figure 11-14 ACPR measurment

11.5.3.1 Main Channel
Set the bandwidth of the main channel, and its power is integrated within this bandwidth.

11.5.3.2 Adj Chn
Set the bandwidth of adjacent channels.

11.5.3.3 Adj Chn Space
Center frequency spacing between the main channel and neighboring channels. Adjusting theadjacent channel spacing will adjust the distance between the previous channel and the backchannel and the main channel at the same time.

11.5.3.4 Info Table
When the information table is “On”, click other menu options and the measurement result table will
not be closed. When the status of the information table is “Off”, the measurement result informationtable will be closed.
www.siglent.com

229

SNA6000A User Manual
ACPR measurement results include: Main CH Power, Left channel power and Right channel power.
⚫

Main CH Power: Displays the power within the bandwidth of the main power⚫

Left channel power : Displays the power of left channel and the power difference between theleft channel and the main channel (in dBc)⚫

Right channel power: Display the power of the right channel and the power difference between
the right channel and the main channel(in dBc)

11.5.4 Occupied BW
Integrates the power within the whole span and calculates the bandwidth occupied by this power
according to the specified power ratio. The OBW function also indicates the difference (namely“Transmit Freq Error”) between the center frequency of the channel under measurement and thecenter frequency of the analyzer.
Select “Channel Power” and click “Meas Setup” to set the corresponding parameters. The twovertical lines on the trace perpendicular to the X-axis represent the occupancy span of the power
percentage. The value on the Y-axis is the power occupying the bandwidth, and displays on theupper right corner.

Figure 11-15 Occuiped BW measurement230

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual
11.5.4.1 Occ BW Percent
Specifies the percentage of total power measured within occupied bandwidth for the current
measurement.

11.5.4.2 Info Table
When the information table is “On”, click other menu options and the measurement result table will
not be closed. When the status of the information table is “Off”, the measurement result informationtable will be closed.
⚫

Occupied Bandwidth: Integrates the power within the whole span and then calculates the
bandwidth occupied by the power according to the specified power ratio.

⚫

Power: the power according to the specified power ratio.

⚫

Total Power: the whole span power.

⚫

Transmit Freq Error: The difference between the center frequency of the channel and thecenter frequency of the analyzer.

11.5.5 TOI
11.5.5.1 TOI Overview
TOI is the function that is automatic measurement of IP3 (Third order Intercept Point), including thepower of fundamental wave and the Third order in the power, and calculate the adjustable Intercept
Point. After entering the SA mode, select the TOI function, then the measurement is automatically
performed without setting parameters.

www.siglent.com

231

SNA6000A User Manual

Figure 11-16 TOI measurement

If the user needs to modify the TOI related parameter settings, they can set the relevant parameters
by pressing Setup, as shown in Figure 11-16. Tone is used to set the acquisition method for thefundamental frequency signal. When Tone is set to automatic, it analyzes the information of the input
signal and selects the two peak signals with the highest amplitude to obtain the amplitude andfrequency of the fundamental frequency signal. When Tone is set to manual, users use "Lower Tone"and "Upper Tone" to input the frequency of the fundamental frequency signal. At this time, relevant
information will be calculated based on the power value at the input frequency point, and it will not
determine whether the signal at the set frequency point is a peak signal.

In automatic mode, TOI searches for positive peaks within the sweeping range, and takes the firsttwo peaks as the fundamental frequency and marks them as f2 and f3, corresponding to theamplitude p2 and p3. If no peak value meets the conditions, the test is considered to have failed. The
message "Two peaks are not found." is displayed, which can be found in the message bar. If two
peaks are found, the Frequency point of the intermodulation component f1 = 2* f2-F3, f4 = 2* F3-F2.
If a point in f1 and f4 exceeds the scanning range, the prompt "Frequency of toi is out of range." will
be displayed, and this information can be found in the message bar. If f1 and f4 are in the sweeping
range, the corresponding power is denoted as p3 and p4, and the crossover interception point iscalculated according to the above information:

232

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual
IP3_Lower = (p2 –p1)/2 + p2
IP3_Upper = (p3 –p4)/2 + p3
The calculation process for manual mode and automatic mode is the same, but the process of finding
the fundamental frequency signal is omitted.

11.5.5.2 TOI Info Table
When the information table is "On", click other menu options, the result information table will not
close, Otherwise close the result information table. If all the information of the third-order crossover issuccessfully calculated, the result information table displays the calculation result of the third-ordercrossover. Otherwise,” – “is displayed. The result information table contains the following contents:⚫

Lower 3rd: Low frequency component of TOI.

⚫

Lower Tone: The lower frequency fundamental signal of the input signal.

⚫

Upper Tone: The Upper frequency fundamental signal of the input signal.

⚫

Upper 3rd: Upper frequency component of TOI.

⚫

Frequency: The frequency of each item in the TOI calculation.

⚫

Amplitude:⚫

dBc: Decibels of the ratio of the intermodulation component to the power of thefundamental frequency signal⚫

TOI: Third-Order Intercept Point

After the information of the TOI is successfully calculated, the smaller of the two TOI points
and the corresponding dBc is displayed separately.

www.siglent.com

233

SNA6000A User Manual

11.5.6 CNR
11.5.6.1 CNR Overview
Measure the power of the carrier and noise of the specified bandwidth and their ratio. Select CNR
measure and click Meas Setup menu to set the corresponding parameters.

Figure 11-17 CNR measurement

Carrier BandWidth: Set the bandwidth of the carrier to be measured. Carrier bandwidth is correlatedwith Span, Noise bandwidth and Frequency offset.
Noise BandWidth: Set the bandwidth of the noise to be measured. Noise bandwidth is correlatedwith Span, Carrier bandwidth and Frequency offset.
Frequence Offset: Set the difference between carrier center frequency and noise center frequency.
Frequency offset is correlated with Span, Carrier bandwidth and. Noise bandwidth.
11.5.6.2 CNR Info Table
When the information table is "On", click other menu options, the result information table will not
close, Otherwise close the result information table.
⚫

234

Carrier Power: the total power of the carrier bandwidth.

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual⚫

Noise Power: the total power of the selected noise bandwidth.

⚫

Carrier Noise Ratio: the ratio of Carrier Power to Noise Power.

11.5.7 Spectrum Monitor
11.5.7.1 Spectrum Monitor Overview
Display the power of the swept spectrum as an intensity color map commonly referred to as awaterfall chart. Select Spectrum Monitor measure and click Meas Setup menu to set thecorresponding parameters.

Figure 11-18 Spectrum Monitor

Monitor Length: Set the length of the Monitor. The minimum value is10 and the maximum value is
800.
Restart: clear the measurement and then restart it.
Spectrum Monitor Run/Pause: User can choose whether to run/pause the spectrum monitoring. If
the current state is running, click the "Spectrum monitoring" menu to pause the monitoring, and thespectrum monitoring chart will not be refreshed. If the current state is pause, click the "Spectrum
monitoring" button to start the monitoring, and the spectrum monitoring chart will continue to refreshwww.siglent.com

235

SNA6000A User Manual
after the previous suspended state.

11.5.7.2 Spectrum Monitor Info Table
When the information table is "On", click other menu options, the result information table will not
close, Otherwise close the result information table.
⚫

The horizontal is the frequency axis, the vertical is the time axis, and the color represents theenergy magnitude of the spectrum.

⚫

It is used to monitor the frequency spectrum of discontinuity. Through the frequency spectrum
monitoring, the change of the signal in a period of time can be observed.

⚫

The spectrum monitoring chart is refreshed from the bottom up, and the number marked on theleft indicates the maximum number of monitoring frames that can be displayed in the current
spectrum display window. Note that the frame number may be less than the monitoring length
set by the user, and the monitoring length does not conflict with the maximum number ofmonitoring frames that can be displayed. If the length of the spectrum monitoring chart is lessthan 40, and the left side will not display the numbers.

⚫

The maximum and minimum values of the measurement level in the current trace window aredisplayed at the left and right ends of the reference color bar, and the reference color bar isaligned with the spectrum monitoring chart in the center. When the spectrum display window isless than a certain value, the measurement level value is not displayed, and only the color bar isdisplayed.

⚫

The spectrum monitoring chart is aligned with the frequency of the trace window to indicate the
one-to-one correspondence between the spectrum monitoring chart and the frequency.

11.6 SA Trace operation
The vector network analyzer supports mathematical operations between traces or between traces
and specified offsets in SA mode, and its results are displayed using another trace. As shown in the
figure:236

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual

In the function expression z=f (x, y), two identical input traces can be set, but the output trace cannot
be set as the input trace at the same time. The input and output settings in different mathematical
relationships are independent of each other. VNA provides four types of mathematical budgeting in
SA mode:⚫

Power subtraction: 𝑇𝑟𝑍 = 10 log(10𝑇𝑟𝑋⁄10 - 10𝑇𝑟𝑌⁄10)⚫

Power addition: 𝑇𝑟𝑍 = 10 log(10𝑇𝑟𝑋⁄10 + 10𝑇𝑟𝑌⁄10)⚫

Logarithmic offset: 𝑇𝑟𝑍 = 𝑇𝑟𝑋 + 𝑂𝑓𝑓𝑠𝑒𝑡⚫

Logarithmic subtraction: 𝑇𝑟𝑍 = 𝑇𝑟𝑋 - 𝑇𝑟𝑌 + 𝑅𝑒𝑓

In the above formula, 𝑇𝑟𝑍 refers to the output trace, 𝑇𝑟𝑇𝑟𝑌 refers to the input trace, 𝑂𝑓𝑓𝑠𝑒𝑡 refers to
the specified offset, 𝑅𝑒𝑓 refers to the reference, and the data units are all in dBm. Note: When thesame trace is associated with multiple sets of mathematical relationships, VNA performs operationsin the order of the output trace numbers, which poses a certain risk and makes the results difficult tounderstand. In addition, for the same trace, "mathematical operations", "memory operations", and"analysis" functions cannot run simultaneously. After opening the memory operation and analysis
function, the mathematical operation function will prompt "Conflicted with analysis." or "Conflictedwith memory." After opening the mathematical operation function, the other two functions will prompt"Conflicted with calculation.".

www.siglent.com

237

SNA6000A User Manual

11.7 Correct
Correction supports correcting the measured values on the y-axis on a specific x-axis.
There are currently 6 amendments, all of which are in effect simultaneously.

Correct configuration guide

Corrections enable: is the main switch for correction, used to control whether the correction function
is effective. If this switch is turned off, the correction function cannot be effective;
Select correction: is used to select a correction for processing, and VNA currently has 6 corrections
set;
Corr enable: indicates the enabled situation selected for correction;
Save file and Recall file: are used to quickly load correction data. For the correction function, a. cor
file has been added to record the offset terms corresponding to the amplitude of eachfrequency. After correcting the enable, calculate the amplitude offset term based on the input
frequency to offset the signal "Save file" and "recall file" are used to save and call relevant correction
data.
Edit corrections: is used to edit the selected correction item data, as shown in the figure:238

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User ManualCorrection function menu guide

The data in the correction table is the correction term, and the correction data is saved in the formof<freq, cor value>. "Select corrections" is used to select corrections. VNA supports 6 corrections,each corresponding to a correction table. Selecting corrections is used to edit the corresponding
correction table. "Add Corr", "insert Corr", "delete Corr", and "delete all Corrections" are used toquickly edit correction items in the correction table. When editing the correction table, if the current
measurement format is logarithmic, a blue line will be displayed in the center of the screen as areference, indicating 0dB. The inner column of the left scale axis displays relevant scale information
based on the position of 0dB and the scale value for reference.

11.8 Power calibration in SA mode
The vector network analyzer undergoes source power calibration and receiver power calibration
before leaving the factory. However, power calibration before leaving the factory may not guarantee
sufficient accuracy in any scenario used by users, so users can perform a power calibration before
testing to improve the accuracy of the test. As shown in the figure:www.siglent.com

239

SNA6000A User Manual

Power calibration guide

The measurement data after on-site calibration is still affected by factors such as cables, fixtures, andadapters. In order to input accurate signals at the input end of the DUT and improve the accuracy of
power measurement results at both ends of the DUT, users need to perform calibration again andmove the calibration surface to both ends of the test piece. The steps for power calibration in SA
mode are as follows:

1) Click on power calibration to enter the power interface;2) Choose whether to perform receiver power calibration;3) Select the power meter access port, set power calibration information, connect the port to thepower meter, and click "take SWP" to scan;

4) If receiver power calibration is not performed, click finish to complete the source power calibrationof the port. If receiver power calibration is performed, click next to enter the basic calibrationinterface;5) Enter the basic calibration interface, select the relevant parameters for basic calibration, andperform port calibration;6) After configuring the basic calibration parameters, click next and follow the interface prompts toconnect the relevant calibration components. After measuring the relevant data, click finish tocomplete the source power calibration and receiver power calibration for the basic calibration port.

240

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual

Power Compensation guide

After completing power calibration, configure the relevant options to set the enabling status ofcalibration data. It should be noted that only by using at least one port as the source port output
signal can the enable status of source power calibration be set, otherwise relevant information cannot
be set.

11.9 Fixture measurement in SA mode
For the DUT to be measured in the fixture, the traditional power calibration method can not move thereference plane of the receiver to the two ends of the DUT to be measured. In order to improve theaccuracy of power measurement, the measured data can be processed by impedance transform,
port matching, two-port de-embedding and port extension, thus, the measuring reference plane isconsistent with the plane of the DUT to be measured.
Power calibration in spectrum analysis mode, port extension processing by referring to “Portextension” chapter, and configuration of relevant parameters of fixture measurement by referring to“Fixture measurement function” chapter, the accurate power value can be measured.

www.siglent.com

241

SNA6000A User Manual

12 Frequency Offset Mode12.1 Overview
Generally with network analyzers, the frequency must be the same both at the signal source and at
the receiver, so frequency-translating devices such as mixers or converters cannot be measured. To
enable the analyzer to measure frequency conversion devices, the receiver frequency must be
synchronized with a frequency consisting of the input frequency and a certain added offset, which iscalled frequency-offset sweep. The frequency offset sweep function of SNA6000A can be used formixers related measurement.
The SNA6000A provides not only this frequency-offset sweep but state-of-the-art mixer calibration
features: scalar-mixer calibration. Scalar-Mixer Calibration performs high-accuracy measurement forthe magnitude and reflection parameter of mixer conversion loss.
Moreover, the SNA6000A supports an absolute measurement function. The network analyzers
normally measure the ratio of the test signal's magnitude and phase to the reference signal. In
contrast, the absolute measurement function performs a measurement of the absolute value of thetest signal's magnitude. In combination with the frequency-offset function, the absolute measurement
function provides measurements that include measurement of harmonic distortion. It also provides
high-accuracy measurement when combined with Power Calibration and Receiver Calibration.

12.2 Frequency Offset Mode
Frequency Offset Mode (FOM) enables the SNA internal RF signal source and SNA port receiver tooperate at different frequencies. To realize the measurement of nonlinear characteristics of thedevice.

242

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual

12.2.1 Frequency Offset settings
Press [Freq] > Freq Offset… to enter the frequency offset function setting dialog box.

A. Frequency Offset (ON/OFF) Enables Frequency Offset Mode on ALL measurements that arepresent in the active channel. When frequency offset function is not enabled, all frequencies are
the same as the Primary frequency.
B. Sources and Receivers⚫

Primary the current Active Channel settings. When a Source or Receiver is coupled to thePrimary settings, its Sweep Type is the same as that of the Primary. The frequency settingsof the coupled range are mathematically derived from the Primary settings using theMultiplier, Divisor and offset values. With this approach, only the Primary settings need to bechanged in order to affect change in the coupled Sources and Receivers. Changes to thePrimary channel settings occur when Frequency Offset is checked ON.
Primary settings are only used when Sources and Receivers are Coupled. It is often easier
to Uncouple, then set Sources and Receivers independently.

⚫

Source the internal source signal of the VNA.

⚫

Receivers All receivers that are used in the channel, including Reference receivers, aretuned to the specified frequency settings.

C. Modewww.siglent.com

243

SNA6000A User Manual⚫

Coupled Source and Receiver settings are mathematically derived from the Primary settings
using Multiplier, Divisor, and Offset values.

⚫

Uncoupled Source and Receiver settings are entered independently, without reference toPrimary settings. When Uncoupled, Source and Receiver Ranges can use separate sweep
types.

D. Sweep Type Click to change the type of sweep for each range. Only available for Primary andUncoupled Sources and Receivers.
E.

Settings To change settings click IN the appropriate Settings cell, then will pop up thecorresponding settings dialog box that can be edited. If coupled, invokes the Coupled dialog. If
uncoupled or Primary invokes the Uncoupled settings dialog.

F.

X-Axis Annotation Select the settings to be displayed on the X-Axis.

G. X-Axis Point Spacing Only available when a Segment Sweep Type is selected as the X-Axis
display.

Coupled settings dialog box

A.

Multiplier Specifies (along with the divisor) the value to multiply by the stimulus. The value is244

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual
an integer from -100 to 100.
B.

Divisor Specifies (along with the multiplier) the value to multiply the stimulus. The value is an
integer from -100 to100.

C. Offset Specify the absolute offset frequency (Hz). For the mixer, this will be the LO frequency.
The range is [-5000GHz, 5000GHz].
D. Start Freq = [Primary Start x (Multiplier / Divisor)] + Offset
E.

Stop Freq = [Primary Stop x (Multiplier / Divisor)] + Offset

Primary and Uncoupled settings dialog box

A.

Sweep Type The settings dialog box is vary depending on the sweep type.

B.

Frequency Type Select Start / Stop or Center / span.

C. Start Freq Enter values.
D. Stop Freq Enter values.
E.

Sweep Point (Primary only) Enter number of data points for the sweep.

www.siglent.com

245

SNA6000A User Manual
Tip:
When sweep type is Segment Sweep, the segment table edits are made exactly like the standard
segment table. In segment sweep mode:⚫

The OK button is NOT available until the total number of data points for all segments matches
the number of Primary data points.

⚫

Independent IF Bandwidth and Independent Sweep Time are available ONLY on the Primary(channel) and the Uncoupled Receivers - NOT Sources.

⚫

Independent Power is available ONLY on the Primary (channel) and the Uncoupled Sources NOT Receivers.

246

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual

13 Mixer Measurement
There are two measurement modes for VNA mixer measurement:⚫

Scalar mixer (SMM): Measurement parameters include scalar transmission
characteristics, vector reflection characteristics, and mixer input and output
power. Connect the DUT and VNA according to the following diagram during
measurement.

⚫

Vector mixer (VMM): The measurement parameters include vector S parameters, which
can measure the group delay of the mixer. VNA uses the alternating frequency conversion
method to measure the vector transmission characteristics of DUT, as shown in thefollowing figure. If the DUT operates at down conversion, the calibration mixer needs tooperate at up conversion, and vice versa. Connect the DUT, calibration mixer/filter
combination, power divider, VNA, and external source (if necessary) according to thefollowing diagram.

Before conducting mixer measurements, sufficient preheating is required, followed by the following
steps:
1.

Turn on the mixer measurement modewww.siglent.com

247

SNA6000A User Manual2.

Configure mixer related parameters

3.

Perform source power calibration in SMM/VMM mode (optional)

4.

Perform scalar mixing calibration/vector mixing calibration

5.

Conduct mixer measurement

13.1 How to activate the mixer measurement
Option SMM provides Scalar Mixer Measurements.
Option FCA provides Vector Mixer Measurements.
By pressing the buttons on the front panel, press【Meas】> S-Params > Mode > SMM / VMM,
and the user can select "Active Channel" or "New Channel". After clicking OK, the mixer
measurement function can be turned on in the current channel or new channel.

The “show setup dialog” checkbox is selected by default, indicating that every time the mixer isturned on for measurement, a Mixer Measure Setup dialog box will pop up for users to set mixer
related parameters, as shown in the following figure.
248

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual

If the “show setup dialog” checkbox is unchecked, the Mixer Measure Setup dialog box will not
pop up simultaneously when the user opens the mixer measurement function. If the user needs tomodify the mixer parameter settings again, they can access the Mixer Measure Setup dialog box bypressing the front panel excitation condition buttons 【Start】/【Stop】/【Freq】/【Power】/【Sweep】> mixer measurement.

13.2 Configure mixer related parameters
There may be difficulties configuring the Mixer Measure Setup dialog box for the first time. Whenusers encounter invalid configurations during the parameter configuration process, corresponding
warning prompts will be displayed at the bottom of the dialog box.

The following are effective mixer configuration/sweep type combinations:
Sweep Type

RF(input）

LO(Local）

IF(Output）

SMM

VMM

Start/Stop

Start/Stop

Fixed

√

√

Start/Stop

FixedStart/Stop√√

Linear

www.siglent.com

249

SNA6000A User Manual

CW Time
Power

Fixed

Start/Stop

Start/Stop

√

ⅹ

Fixed

Fixed

Fixed

√

√

Vector mixer requires embedding a calibration mixer/filter combination. When the DUT output isfixed, the calibration mixer input is fixed and LO is scanning. In this working mode, it is impossible toobtain the S2P file of the calibration mixer/filter combination.
Although you may quickly become familiar with configuring the relevant mixer in these tabs, it isbest to perform mixer measurement configuration in the following order when using them for the first
time.

250

1.

Scan the configuration tab.

2.

Power Configuration Tab.

3.

Mixer frequency configuration tab.

4.

Mixer frequency conversion mode configuration tab.

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual

13.2.1 Sweep tab

Sweep Type：⚫

Linear Frequency: Perform linear sweep within the specified frequency range.

⚫

Segment Sweep: Sweep according to the segment sweep table.

⚫

CW Time: All ranges are set to a fixed (CW) frequency and display data relative to time.

⚫

Power Sweep: Sweep input or LO power.

X-Axis Display：When the scanning type is Segment Sweep, X-Axis Point Spacing can only be
selected, and all measurement points will be evenly distributed along the X-axis after selection.
Sweet Point: The number of data points measured during scanning
IF Bandwidth: Set the intermediate frequency bandwidth.

A.

The mixer measurement returns to default settings.

B.

Save the current mixer measurement settings in “.mxr” format.

C.

Load the mixer measurement settings.

www.siglent.com

251

SNA6000A User Manual
D.

Apply mixer settings and close the dialog box.

E.

Cancel the mixer settings and close the dialog box.

F.

Apply mixer configuration.

G.

Open the scalar mixing/vector mixing help document.

13.2.2 Power tab
The Power tab of the Mixer Measure Setup dialog box is used to configure the power output of
the DUT Input (SMM)/Calibration Mixer Input (VMM) and DUT Output ports.

Power On(All Channels): Select to open all internal RF sources of VNA channels.
Port Power Coupled: Select to open the INPUT OUTPUT port source power coupling.
DUT Input Port (SMM) / Calibration Input Port(VMM): Users can select the input port for DUT
Input (SMM)/Calibration Mixer Input (VMM) signals based on the actual connection situation, andthen set the power level of that port.

252

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual
DUT Output Port: Users can select the output port of the DUT based on its actual connection
status, and then set the power level of that port.
DUT Input Port Power Sweep (SMM) / Calibration Input Port Power Sweep (VMM): Whenthe sweep method is power sweep, the Start Power and Stop Power editing boxes can be used forediting settings.
DUT Output Port Power Sweep: When the sweep method is power sweep, the Start Power andStop Power editing boxes can be used for editing settings.

13.2.3 Mixer Frequency Tab
13.2.3.1 Mixer Frequency
The frequency parameters set in this tab are all for the DUT. In VMM mode, the frequency
parameters for calibrating the mixer are automatically calculated by the DUT and do not need to be
set by the user.
Input: The excitation frequency input to the DUT.
Output: The response frequency of the DUT after up or down conversion.

www.siglent.com

253

SNA6000A User Manual

SMM Mixer Frequency tab

254

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual
VMM Mixer Frequency tab

The frequency format can be selected as "Start/Stop", "Center/Span" or "Fixed". For linear
sweep and segment sweep type, at least one of them must be 'Fixed'. When the sweep type is "CWTime" or "Power Sweep", all items must be "Fixed".

A.

DUT input frequency format setting.

B.

LO frequency format setting.

C.

DUT output frequency format setting.

D.

DUT variable frequency selector. When "+" is selected, it represents the sum of the input
frequency and LO frequency; When "-" is selected, it represents the difference between the
input frequency and the LO frequency.

E.

Calculate the input frequency setting based on the user's other DUT settings, such as
setting the frequency range of DUT LO (Local) and output, and click "Calc Input" VNA tocalculate and display the input frequency.

F.

Input>LO indicates that when the DUT selects down conversion and the input signal>local
oscillator signal, this checkbox must be selected in order to calculate the output frequency
by clicking the "Calculate" button.

G.

Calculate the LO frequency setting based on the user's other DUT settings, such as setting
the frequency range for input and output. Clicking on "Calc Local" VNA will calculate anddisplay the LO frequency.

H.

Calculate the output frequency setting based on the user's other DUT settings, such as
setting the frequency range of input and LO (Local), and click "Calc Output" VNA tocalculate and display the output frequency.

13.2.3.2 Segment Sweep Frequency Tab
When selecting segment sweep on the Sweep tab, the "Mixer Frequency" tab will display thefollowing settings.

www.siglent.com

255

SNA6000A User Manual

Segment SMM Mixer Frequency Tab

256

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual

Segment VMM Mixer Frequency Tab

How to configure segmentation:
1.

Click "Add" to add the number of scanned segments.

2.

Click "Delete" to delete a segment and renumber all subsequent segments.

3.

The default state of 'Segment Enable' is open. When not selected, it means closed, and thescan will not include the segment.

4.

Configure frequency settings for input, LO, and output ranges.
⚫

For each segment, the frequency configuration rules of the mixer should also be followed.

⚫

Allow segmented input, LO, and output frequencies to overlap with other segments. At
this point, please configure the segmentation order correctly to fully display the scanningfrequency on the frequency axis.

⚫

Scan all segments in either forward (start<stop) or reverse (start>stop) direction. Mixing
scanning directions is not allowed.

⚫

The following settings can be set separately for each segment:a)Points: The total number of points for all segments is limited to the maximum number

www.siglent.com

257

SNA6000A User Manual
allowed by VNA.
b)

IF bandwidth.

c)Port power: input, output, LO, these settings will override the settings on the power
tab.

⚫

⚫

The following settings apply to all segments:a)LO source selection.

b)

All input and LO product factor settings.

c)Source regulation.

d)X-axis display (input, LO, output).

e)Distance between X-axis points.

Save the mixer segmentation settings information to the "*. mxr" file.

13.2.3.3 Mixing frequency configuration rules
The warning message at the bottom of the dialog box indicates that one or more of the following
settings are invalid:⚫

One of the input frequency, LO frequency, and output frequency of DUT must be within afixed frequency range, or all three must be within a fixed frequency range.

⚫

The input or output frequency cannot exceed the VNA frequency range.

13.2.4 Mixer Setup Tab

258

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual

SMM Mixer Setup Tab

VMM Mixer Setup Tab

www.siglent.com

259

SNA6000A User ManualA.

Select the VNA port to connect to the DUT input.

B.

Select the VNA port to connect to the DUT output.

C.

Local: You can choose between Uncontrolled, Internal Source Mode, and External Source
Mode. When selecting 'Not Controlled', it means that the external source always provides a
fixed frequency and power LO output. When selecting "Port 3" or "Port 4", it means that theinternal source provides a variable LO output. Choose other options to provide variable LO
output for VNA to control external sources.

D.

Add external sources. Connect the external source to any USB interface of the VNA using a
USB cable, and then click on the "External Source" option. After VNA successfully identifies
the external source, the external source device information will appear in the "External
Source" dialog box. When LO selects the external source, VNA will refer to the local
frequency and power configuration and control the external source to provide the specified
local oscillator frequency output during scanning.

E.

This edit box can only be edited when LO is an external source.

F.

The combination of fraction multiplication factors(numerator/denominator) can form afraction value, which is multiplied by the input frequency and LO frequency to obtain thevalue used to calculate the frequency output by the DUT. The numerator and denominator
range of the fraction product factor is -100 to+100, and the denominator cannot be set to 0.
(Unique to scalar mixing)

The example of fraction multiplication factors:
Example 1: The operation of the third harmonic mixer can be replicated using the LO fraction
multiplication factor. When the input frequency and LO frequency are known, VNA can accurately
calculate the receiver frequency.

In the Mixer Measure Setup dialog box, under the Mixer Frequency tab, make the following
settings:

260

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual⚫

Input start：1GHz⚫

Input Stop：3GHz⚫

Local Fixed：1.5GHz⚫

Selection of frequency converter for mixer: difference ("-")⚫

Input score multiplication factor: 1/1⚫

LO score multiplication factor: 3/1⚫

Click on 'Calc Output'⚫

The calculation result is: output start frequency of 3.5GHz, output stop frequency of 1.5GHz

Example 2: When the input frequency, LO frequency, and output frequency are known, using afractional product factor can tune the VNA receiver frequency to the second harmonic of the mixer's 8
GHz base output.

In the Mixer Measure Setup dialog box, under the Mixer Frequency tab, make the following
settings:⚫

Input Fixed：1GHz⚫

Local Fixed：3GHz⚫

Selection of frequency converter for mixer: Sum ("+")⚫

Input score multiplication factor: 2/1⚫

LO score multiplication factor: 2/1⚫

Click on 'Calc Output'⚫

The calculation result is: output Fixed 8GHz

www.siglent.com

261

SNA6000A User Manual
Example 3: When the input frequency and LO frequency are known, using the LO fraction
multiplication factor can replicate the operation of the "divide by 2" mechanism within the mixer
packet. After completing this operation, VNA can accurately calculate the frequency of the receiver.

In the Mixer Measure Setup dialog box, under the Mixer Frequency tab, make the following
settings:⚫

Input start：50MHz⚫

Input Stop：100MHz⚫

Local Fixed：600MHz⚫

Selection of frequency converter for mixer: Sum ("+")⚫

Input score multiplication factor: 1/1⚫

LO score multiplication factor: 2/1⚫

Click on 'Calc Output'⚫

The calculation result is: the output start frequency is 350MHz, and the output stopfrequency is 400MHz.

13.3 Noise suppression (optional)
The "noise suppression" function of the mixer can prevent unnecessary mixing products fromappearing on the VNA screen. When performing scalar mixer measurements, noise suppression isturned off by default. Press the【Cal】key on the front panel → Mixer Cal... → Avoid Spur to enable
it. The vector mixer has built-in noise suppression function, which does not require user operation. To
obtain more accurate measurement results as much as possible, please ensure that the state ofnoise suppression during calibration is consistent with that during measurement.

262

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual

13.4 Source power calibration (optional)
In the mixer measurement mode, connect the power meter to the VNA port, press the【Cal】
button on the front panel -> power calibration ->perform source calibration related configuration->"Take Cal Sweep", and perform source power calibration.

13.5 Mixer calibration
13.5.1 Scalar mixer calibration
13.5.1.1 Overview
VNA has scalar mixing calibration function, which can be used to measure frequency conversion
equipment.
By using a combination of calibration standards (open circuit/short circuit/load) and a power
meter for calibration, scalar mixing calibration allows for higher accuracy measurement of theamplitude, reflection parameters, and power parameters of the frequency conversion loss of themixer.
For the measurement of frequency conversion losses in frequency conversion equipment,
conventional full 2-port calibration cannot be utilized due to the frequency difference between the
excitation port and the response port. Therefore, scalar mixing calibration compensates for mixer
measurements using a corrected full 2-port error model. By using scalar mixing calibration, thefollowing error components can be corrected:⚫

Reflection (vector error correction) between the output port of the network analyzer and the
input port of the tested mixer.

⚫

Reflection (vector error correction) between the output port of the tested mixer and the input
port of the network analyzer.

⚫

Transmission frequency characteristics at different frequencies (scalar error correction).

⚫

Network analyzer source power, excitation port, and receiver port receiver power.

Due to the fact that the transmission tracking error term in the error model used for scalar mixing
calibration is a scalar value, the phase portion of the compensated transmission measurement result
is invalid.

www.siglent.com

263

SNA6000A User Manual
13.5.1.2 Calibration steps
In SMM mode, use scalar mixing calibration to compensate for source power, receiver, and Sparameter measurements. In SMM mode, press the "Cal" button on the front panel>Mixer
Calibration>Mixer Calibration... to enter the mixer calibration wizard interface. Follow the wizard
instructions to connect the calibration kit, and click the corresponding kit name on the UI to perform
scalar mixing calibration.

Scalar mixer calibration activation interfaceA.

The calibration of all two ports uses electronic calibration, which is not optional whenelectronic calibration components are not inserted.

B.

The power calibration vector network excitation and receiving port are independently
connected to a power meter.

C.

During calibration, it is in the 'noise suppression' state.

13.5.1.3 Check the error calibration status of the channel
After the calibration of the scalar mixer is completed, the trace status area on the UI will display
the symbol of the error calibration type that the trace has performed. After calibration of the scalar
mixer, all two port calibration, excitation receiving port receiver calibration, and excitation receiving

264

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual
port source power calibration are effective for correction. After calibration, the S parameter trace
status identifier displays "[F2]".

Trace status identification

13.5.2 Vector mixer calibration
13.5.2.1 overview
VNA has vector mixing calibration function, allowing for higher precision measurement of mixer S
parameters. Through vector transmission characteristics, the group delay characteristics of the mixer
can be obtained. When measuring vector mixing, a calibration mixer/filter combination is introduced.
In order to obtain the characteristics of the DUT separately, the calibration mixer and filter have thefollowing basic requirements:⚫

The operating frequency range of the calibration mixer should be greater than or equal to
the DUT.

⚫

Vector mixing measurement eliminates the influence of the calibration mixer/filter
combination when measuring DUT through the method of de embedding. Therefore, it isnecessary to obtain the S parameters of the calibration mixer/filter combination, which
requires the calibration mixer to have reciprocity, that is, S21=S12. For passive mixers, thisis consistent.

⚫

The filter suppresses the input signal of the calibration mixer by calibrating the output signalof the mixer.

Vector mixing calibration first performs full two port calibration, then characterizes the calibration
mixer/filter combination to obtain S parameters, and finally embeds the corrected full two port
calibration error model. By using vector mixing calibration, the following error components can becorrected:⚫

Reflection (vector error correction) between the output port of the network analyzer and the
input port of the calibration mixer.

www.siglent.com

265

SNA6000A User Manual⚫

Reflection (vector error correction) between the output port of the tested mixer and the input
port of the network analyzer.

⚫

The S parameter introduced by calibrating the mixer/filter combination.

13.5.2.2 Calibration steps
In VMM mode, use vector mixing calibration to compensate for S-parameter measurements. In
VMM mode, press the "Cal" button on the front panel>Mixer Calibration>Mixer Calibration... to enter
the mixer calibration wizard interface. Follow the wizard instructions to connect the calibration kit, andclick the corresponding kit name on the UI to perform vector mixing calibration.

Characterization calibration mixer/filter combination configuration interface

When characterizing the calibration mixer/filter combination, its S parameters can be obtained
through the calibration wizard, or the S2P file can be imported through "Import S2P File" forcharacterization.

266

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual

Characterization and calibration of mixer/filter combination interface

After calibrating the mixer/filter combination, the characterization parameters can be saved
through "Save Calibration Mixer/Filter S2P Flie" for direct loading next time.

13.5.2.3 Check the error calibration status of the channel
After the calibration of the vector mixer is completed, the trace status area on the UI will display
the symbol of the error calibration type that has been executed for the trace. The vector mixer
calibration is a corrected two port calibration, so after calibration, the S parameter trace status
identifier displays "[F2]".

Trace status identificationwww.siglent.com

267

SNA6000A User Manual

14 Pulse Measurement
14.1 Overview
Pulse measurements are used to test devices that cannot be tested using continuous signals, suchas GSM power amplifiers.

14.2 Open/Close Pulse Measurement
Option PM must be enabled.
To switch on/off the PM option, use the order Sweep->Pulse Setup. If you have the trial license for
the PM option, an information dialog will appear to notify you that the trial times will decrease. If thetrial times expire, a permanent license is needed to switch on the PM option.

Figure 14-1 The Pulse Measurement setting interface268

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual

14.3 Pulse Measurement Settings
14.3.1 Pulse Measurement
Off: Source and Receivers are NOT pulsedStandard Pulse: With pulsed RF, the SNA can be configured to sweep in frequency, power sweep,
and CW time.
Pulse Profile: Pulse profile measurements provides a time domain (CW frequency) view of the pulse
envelope.

Figure 14-2 Profile Pulse
1st Point

2nd Point

Step enableSweep
14.3.2 Pulse
Timing PLL Locked Delay1 ON Delay2
ConfigIFBWOFFDelay3

PLL

Tp

Source
Pulse

Acq
Pulse

www.siglent.com

Td1

Td0

Ts1

Ta

Ts0

Ta

269

SNA6000A User Manual

Pulse Width: Sets the width of the source pulse (Ts1).
Pulse Period: The time to make one complete pulse (Tp).
Pulse Frequency: The reciprocal of Period (1/ Period).
Pulse Delay: The delay between the start of the pulse and the generation of the pulse (Td1).

14.3.3 Properties
RF&IF Path Gain: Click to launch the RF&IF Path Gain dialog.
Autoselect Profile Sweep Time: This function is enabled only in pulse profile mode. When checked,
only the source pulse width can be set. The pulse period is automatically set to 2 times the pulse
width, and the pulse signal is placed in the middle of the whole signal. This allows you to see acomplete pulse in the center of the screen.
Number of Points:⚫

Standard Pulse: Sets the number of data points for the measurement.

⚫

Pulse Profile: Disable the number setting function, only for display.

IFBW: Select the IFBW for the measurement. The value of IFBW in Profile mode is affected by pulse
width and pulse period.
1st Point

2nd Point

Step enable

14.3.4 Measurement
TimingSweep
Config

PLL Locked Delay1 ON Delay2

IFBW

OFF

Delay3

PLL

Tp

Source
Pulse

Acq
Pulse

Td1

Td0

Ts1

Ta

Ts0

Ta

Measurement Delay:⚫
270

Standard Pulse: Receiver delay (Td0).
www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual⚫

Pulse Profile: Disabled and has no practical significance.

Measurement Width: Receiver pulse width (Ts0), whose value depends on the selected IFBW
value.
Pulse Trigger Source: Set the pulse trigger source.
Autoselect Width and Delay: This function is enabled only in Standard mode. When checked, only
pulse period and pulse frequency can be set, and the source pulse width can be adjusted toapproximately 75% of the pulse period, with 20% delay. This leaves approximately 5% of the source
pulse ON after the acquisition is completed.

14.4 RF&IF Path Gain dialog

Figure 14-3 RF&IF Path Gain dialog

Receiver: Choose the receiver to be set.
Path Gain:⚫

Low: The minimum attenuation mode, the average noise level is lower.

www.siglent.com

271

SNA6000A User Manual⚫

Medium: The medium attenuation mode, the average noise level is normal.

⚫

High: The maximum attenuation mode, the average noise level is higher.

Couple all paths: Check to make the same setting for all receivers.

272

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual

15 Material Measurement
15.1 Overview
Material measurement can provide key parameter information for many electronic applications,mainly involving the measurement of permittivity and permeability. A sample to be measured isplaced in a waveguide measuring device, and both ports of the waveguide device are connected to acalibrated network analyzer through waveguide coaxial converters, as shown in the following figure.
Measure parameters S11, S22, S21 and S12 respectively. By selecting an appropriate dataprocessing method and substituting the S parameter value to calculate the complex relative
permittivity and complex relative permeability, the material measurement can be completed.

Vector Network
Analyzer

Waveguide Coaxial
Converter

Waveguide Coaxial
Converter

Waveguide Device
for Placing Tested
SampleFigure 15-1 Test Schematic Diagram

In order to obtain accurate measurement results, after the waveguide coaxial converter is connectedto the VNA port, the VNA should be fully preheated before the material is measured, and thefollowing steps are carried out to realize the material measurement:
1.

Create a MT measurement;

2.

Configure the Material Measurement Setup;3.

Do the waveguide TRL calibration in material measurement mode;www.siglent.com

273

SNA6000A User Manual
4.

Connect the waveguide and the waveguide coaxial converter to measure the material.

15.2 Create a MT Measurement
Option MT must be enabled.
Press [Meas] > Mode > MATERIAL. After selecting the MATERIAL measurement mode, the user
can choose whether to check "New Channel" or not then click OK. A Material measurement isdisplayed on the current channel or on a new channel and New Window.

Figure 15-2 MATERIAL mode channel selection dialog box

In the interface of the MATERIAL channel selection dialog box, the “Show Setup Dialog” checkbox

is selected by default. when user clicks “OK”, a Material Measurement Setup dialog box will be
displayed that can set related parameters. As figure shown below:274

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual

Figure 15-3 Material Measurement Setup dialog box

If the Show Setup Dialog check box is deselected, the Material Measurement Setup dialog box will
not be displayed when the MATERIAL function is enabled. If the user wants to modify the MATERIAL
parameters, You can call up the Material Measurement Setup dialog box by pressing 【Meas】>
Meas Setup > Meas Setup.

15.3 Configure the Material Measurement Setup
The Material Measurement Setup dialog box interface has four tabs: Preset tab, Measurement Modeltab, Sample Holder tab and Waveguide Gap Correction tab.

15.3.1 Preset Tab

www.siglent.com

275

SNA6000A User Manual

Figure 15-4 Preset Tab

Select Ports:⚫

1st Port: Select the port as the forward port for connecting the waveguide holder converter.

⚫

2nd Port: Select the port as the reverse port for connecting the waveguide holder converter.

Sweep:

276⚫

Sweep Type: Set the sweep type, and you can choose Linear Frequency or Log Frequency.

⚫

Start Freq: Set the sweep start frequency.

⚫

Stop Freq: Set the sweep stop frequency.

⚫

Sweep Points: Set the sweep points.

⚫

IFBW: Set the IF bandwidth.

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual
Power：⚫

Port1 Power: Set the power level of the forward port.

⚫

Port2 Power: Set the power level of the reverse port.

⚫

Coupling: Set whether the power levels of the forward and reverse ports are consistent.

Quick Setting: Based on the information of the waveguide fixture, quickly set the relevant
parameters. Click Lookup... to jump to the Lookup Table tab dialog box. The Lookup Table provides
relevant data of commonly used waveguide fixtures, allowing for quick selection and setting of
waveguide fixture related parameters. Then click Apply, and the corresponding items will be changed.

Figure 15-5 Lookup Table Tab

Lookup Table:⚫

Band: Waveguide bandwidth type.

⚫

Width(mm): The width of the waveguide holder.

⚫

Cut-off Freq(GHz): Cut-off frequency of waveguide holder.

www.siglent.com

277

SNA6000A User Manual⚫

Operating Freq Range(GHz): Sweep frequency range.

⚫

Set to Nominal: Indicates whether to quickly set relevant parameters according to waveguideinformation; if it is selected, the parameters of the corresponding item will be set; otherwise,
the parameters will not be set.
a)Start/Stop Freq.: Start/Stop frequency.

b)

Cut-off Freq.: Cut-off frequency.

c)

Air Gap Params.: Air gap parameter. When checked, the width of waveguide holder will
be displayed according to the selected waveguide holder.

15.3.2 Measurement Model Tab

Figure 15-6 Measurement Model Tab

Measurement Model: There are several different measurement models to choose from, and eachmodel has different advantages and limitations.
⚫
278

Ref/Tran μ&ε: The complex relative permittivity and complex relative permeability of materials
www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manualare calculated by NRW algorithm, which will be affected by the half-wave syntony of materials,
and used to measure the permittivity and permeability of materials.
⚫

Ref/Tran ε Precision: The complex relative permittivity of nonmagnetic materials is calculated
by NIST algorithm, which is used to measure the permittivity of materials.

⚫

Verify Estimate: Indicates the initial estimated value, which is only displayed under the
Ref/Tran ε Precision measurement model.
➢

Premittivity: Indicates the dielectric constant of the material, and is used to set the initial
estimated value of the dielectric constant of the material.

⚫

Tran ε Fast: The non-iterative algorithm is used to quickly calculate the complex relative
permittivity for non-magnetic materials, which is used to measure the permittivity of materials.

Calculate Type:⚫

Average Only: After using forward and reverse calculation of material parameters, calculate
the average value to obtain the final result.

⚫

Forward Only: Use the transmission coefficient and reflection coefficient of the forward port
to calculate material parameters.

⚫

Reverse Only: Use the transmission coefficient and reflection coefficient of the reverse port
to calculate material parameters.

15.3.3 Sample Holder Tab
The sample holder tab interface allows you to define sample holder and sample.

www.siglent.com

279

SNA6000A User Manual

Figure 15-7 Sample Holder Tab

Sample Holder Length: Sets the length of the sample holder.
Distance To Sample: Sets the distance between the sample and the reference plane of the forward
port.
Sample Thickness: Sample length.

Sample Holder: Select the sample holder.
⚫

Waveguide: Waveguide model.

Waveguide: Waveguide-related parameter settings, you can use the Find… button to quickly set
waveguide information.
⚫

Cutoff Frequency: The cutoff frequency of the waveguide, which will be automaticallycalculated according to the waveguide width.

280⚫

Waveguide Width: Waveguide width.

⚫

Find: Give the information of all optional waveguides, and select the correspondingwww.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual
waveguide item to quickly set the information of waveguides.

15.3.4 Waveguide Gap Correction Tab

Figure 15-8 waveguide Gap Correction Tab

Small Width of Waveguide: Waveguide height.
Small Width of Sample: Sample height.
Correction On: After being checked, the calculation result is corrected according to the height
information of waveguide and sample.

15.4 Waveguide TRL Calibration
Because the waveguide measurement needs an external adapter, it is necessary to calibrate the
VNA and move the calibration reference plane to both ends of the waveguide coaxial adapter.
The two-port TRL calibration method does not need to know the index parameters of the calibrationwww.siglent.com

281

SNA6000A User Manual
kit, and all the error items in the error model of the test device can be figured out through three
simple connection methods. TRL calibration scheme will use the THRU straight through calibration
element, reflection calibration kit (Open or Short), and a small section of transmission line.

Operating steps:
1.

Preset vector network analyzer;

2.

Switch to MATERIAL mode and set the corresponding waveguide holder, sweep points, power
level and other parameters;3.

Select Cal → Basic Cal to enter the Settings screen, as shown in the figure below:

Figure 15-9 Calibration Wizard Interface

4.

Select both Port 1 and Port 2, select the required waveguide calibrator in Cal Kit, select TRL in
the Cal Type, and click Next to proceed to the next step;

Figure 15-10 Calibration Wizard Interface

5.

Connect waveguide coaxial adapters to Port1 and Port2 respectively, and the calibration plane A
and the calibration plane B are directly connected together and fixed with screws. Click Thru to282

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manualcomplete the through calibration of Port1 and Port2;

Vector Network
Analyzer
Port
1

Port
2

Short

1/4 Line

Cable

Cable

Waveguide Coaxial
Adapter

Calibration Plane A

Waveguide Coaxial
Adapter

Calibration Plane B

Figure 15-11 Schematic Diagram of Waveguide Calibration Connection

6.

The calibration plane A is connected with the short calibration element, and fixed with screws.
Click the Reflect item of Port1 to complete the reflection calibration of Port1;

7.

The calibration plane B is connected with the short calibration element, and fixed with screws.
Click the Reflect item of Port2 to complete the reflection calibration of Port2;

8.

Connect the 1/4Line calibration element between the calibration plane A and the calibration planeB, fix it with screws, and click the corresponding Line item to complete the calibration of Port1 andPort2 transmission lines;

www.siglent.com

283

SNA6000A User Manual

Figure 15-12 Calibration Wizard Interface

9.

After the calibration, click Finish to exit the calibration interface, complete the calibration, andsave the calibration data.

15.5 Sample Measurement
15.5.1 Sample Installation
Sample installation steps are as follows:
Load the sample into the waveguide from the waveguide port. Be careful when loading the sample to
avoid sample damage. After loading, the plane of one side of the sample should be flush with the
waveguide reference plane, as shown in the following figure:

Waveguide

Reference
Plane
Air Gap

TestedSampleFigure 15-13 Schematic Diagram of Sample Installation284

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual

15.5.2 Sample Electromagnetic Parameter Measurement
The electromagnetic parameters of the tested sample are measured as follows:1.

In the material measurement mode, set parameters in the Preset tab interface, or you can quickly
set related parameters through Quick Setting;2.

Calibrate the vector network analyzer;

3.

Put the sample to be tested into the holder, and connect the sample holder to the calibrationreference plane and fix it with screws, as shown in the following figure:

Vector Network
Analyzer
Port
1

Port
2

Cable
Cable

Waveguide Coaxial
Adapter

SampleHolderCalibration Plane A

Waveguide Coaxial
Adapter

Calibration Plane B

Figure 15-14 Schematic Diagram of Equipment Connection

4.

Set Measurement Model and Calculate Type in the Measurement Model tab interface. If the
Measurement Model is set to Ref/Tran ε Precision, you need to set the initial estimated value of
permittivity;

5.

Set the sample holder, sample and waveguide related parameters on the interface of Sample
Holder tab and Waveguide Gap Correction tab;6.

When measuring the permittivity, set the measurement mode to ε and the data format to the Real.
The measurement results are shown in the following figure:www.siglent.com

285

SNA6000A User Manual

Figure 15-15 Permittivity Measurement Results (PEI Material)

7.

When measuring magnetic permeability, the Measurement Model should be set to Ref/Tran μ&ε,
the measurement mode should be set to μ, and the data format should be set to Real. The
measurement results are shown in the following figure:286

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual

Figure 15-16 Permeability Measurement Results (PEI Material)

www.siglent.com

287

SNA6000A User Manual

16 Gain Compression Measurement
16.1 Overview
An amplifier has a region of linear gain, where the gain is independent of the input power level. This
gain is commonly referred to as small signal gain. As the input power is increased to a level thatcauses the amplifier to approach saturation, the gain will decrease. The 1 dB gain compression isdefined as the input power level that causes amplifier gain to drop 1 dB relative to the linear gain.
The gain compression function (GC) measures the compression power of the amplifier and various
parameters of the amplifier at the compression point.

16.2 Create a GC Measurement
Option GC must be enabled.
Press [Meas] > Mode > Gain Compression. After selecting the Gain Compression measurementmode, the user can choose whether to check "New Channel" or not then click OK. A GC
measurement is displayed on the current channel or on a new channel and New Window.

Gain Compression mode channel selection dialog box
In the interface of the GC channel selection dialog box, the “Show Setup Dialog” check box isselected by default. when user clicks “OK”, a Gain Compression Setup dialog box will be displayedthat can set related parameters. As figure shown below:288

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual

Gain Compression Setup dialog box
If the Show Setup Dialog check box is deselected, the Gain Compression Setup dialog box will not
be displayed when the GC function is enabled. If the user wants to modify the GC parameters, You
can call up the Gain Compression Setup dialog box by pressing[Start]/[Stop]/[Freq]/[Power]/[Sweep] > GC Setup….

16.3 Gain Compression Parameters
Parameter

Description

S11

Input MatchLinearS21

GainS-parameters

S12

Reverse Isolation

S22

Output Match

Compression
Parameters

www.siglent.com

CompIn21

Input power at the compression point.

CompOut21

Output power at the compression point.

CompGain21

Gain at the compression point.

CompS11

Input Match at the compression point.

RefS21

Linear Gain value used to calculate the compression
level. This is calculated differently depending on thecompression method.

289

SNA6000A User Manual
CompGain21 MINUS Linear Gain (in Log Mag
format).

DeltaGain21

16.4 Configure the Gain Compression Setup
16.4.1 Frequency Tab

GC Setup Frequency Tab
Sweep Type: Choose a linear sweep or a logarithmic sweep.
Data Acquisition Modes: The GCA offers three modes for data acquisition: Two 2D sweep modes,
and SMART sweep.
⚫

SMART Sweep: SMART Sweep is usually the fastest and most accurate method tomeasure Gain Compression. Unlike the 2D acquisition modes which measure all of thespecified frequency / power points, SMART Sweep performs a series of power search
iterations. At each frequency, an 'intelligent guess' of input power is made to find thecompression level that is within tolerance. This guess is further refined with each successive
power search iteration sweep.

⚫

Sweep Power per Frequency(2D): Input power is stepped from Start to Stop at eachspecified frequency. From the following example you can see that the device is exposed tothe highest power level (p3) at the first frequency (f1). This could heat the device early in themeasurement and affect compression results.

290

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual⚫

Sweep Frequency per Power(2D): Frequency is swept from start to stop at each specified
power level as follows:

Frequency Setting: Configure the frequency axis, including frequency sweep points, frequency
range and IFBW.

16.4.2 Power Tab

GC Setup Power Tab
Port Setting: Configure the input port and output port for connecting the VNA to the DUT, and set thelinear input power and reverse power.
⚫

Linear Input Power: The input power that yields the linear gain of the DUT. The linear gain isused as the reference gain when calculating the Compression from Linear Gain. Input
match is also measured at this power level.

⚫

Reverse Output Power: Sets power level into the output of the DUT for reverse sweeps.
Port power is automatically uncoupled. Reverse power is applied to the DUT ONLY under
the following conditions. Otherwise, this setting is ignored.
1. When Linear Output Match or Linear Reverse Isolation parameters are requested.

www.siglent.com

291

SNA6000A User Manual
2. When Full 2-port correction is used. You can perform a full 2-port cal and downgrade toan Enhanced Response Cal to prevent reverse power from being applied to the DUT.
Power Setting: Configure the power axis, including power sweep points and power range.

16.4.3 Compression Tab

GC Setup Compression Tab
Compression Method: GCA offers the following methods to find the compression point of an amplifier
using GCA:⚫

Compression from Linear Gain: The specified compression Magnitude Level is measured
from the linear gain. The linear gain is measured using the Linear Input Power that is
specified on the Power tab.

⚫

Compression from Max Gain: The specified compression level is measured from the
maximum gain level. In SMART sweep, the Max Gain value is updated as each iteration
occurs. To increase the chances of measuring the actual maximum gain of the amplifier,
Safe Sweep should be invoked using low Coarse and Fine increments.

⚫

Compression from Back Off: This compression method uses the Compression Level andBack Off values for finding the compression point.

⚫

X/Y Compression: This compression method uses the specified parameters (X and Y) as
the criterion for finding the compression point.

⚫

Compression from Saturation: Similar to Compression from Max Gain, except the specifiedcompression level is measured from the maximum power out level. Use this method to292

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual
better find the compression point when measuring amplifiers with non-monotonic gain. In
SMART sweep, the Max power out value is updated as each iteration occurs. To increase
the chances of measuring the actual maximum power out of the amplifier, Safe Sweep
should be invoked using low Coarse and Fine increments
SMART Sweep:⚫

Tolerance: Specifies an acceptable range for measuring the compression level. Reducing
this value can significantly increase the number of iterations that are required to find thecompression point.

⚫

Maximum Iterations: Specifies the maximum number of power search iterations SMART
Sweep is allowed. Reducing this value can cause SMART sweep to terminate before allcompression levels are found to within the specified tolerance.

⚫

Show Iterations: When checked, the compression parameter traces are updated at thecompletion of each power search iteration. When cleared, compression parameter traces
are updated when SMART Sweep completes the power search iteration process.

⚫

Safe Mode: Enable smart sweep safe mode, see “SMART Sweep Safe Mode” for details.

2D Sweep - Compression Point Interpolation: When a 2D Sweep is selected (on the Frequencytab), check this box to calculate and display interpolated compression traces. The Target gain is
calculated using a complex linear ratio between the two closest measured values. All compression
parameters are then interpolated using this same ratio. Clear the box to display compression
parameters for the closest compression point, either high or low, to the level specified in theCompression Method setting.
End of Sweep Condition: Specifies the power level applied to the DUT at the completion of a GCA
measurement. Choose from:⚫

Default: Use the default VNA method.

⚫

RF OFF: RF power is turned off when GCA completes a measurement cycle.

⚫

Start Power: RF power is set to the start power level.

⚫

Stop Power: RF power stays at the stop power level.

Settling Time: Used ONLY in SMART Sweep when Back Off or X/Y compression algorithms are
selected. This setting allows additional dwell time when the input power changes from the back-off
level to the compression level.

16.5 SMART Sweep Safe ModeFor use with SMART Sweep ONLY. When enabled, Safe Sweep increases the input power to thewww.siglent.com

293

SNA6000A User Manual
DUT by the specified amounts, allowing the compression point to be achieved gradually. While thiswill increase the number of iterations required to achieve compression, it also minimizes thepossibility of driving the DUT too far into compression.

Safe Mode
Safe Mode (Enable): Check to enable Safe Sweep.
Coarse Increment: Sets the maximum change in input power, up or down, which will be applied to
the DUT from one iteration to the next. Default = 3.0 dB. Without Safe Sweep, the maximum change
in input power can be the entire Backoff or X value when using these compression methods.
Fine Increment: Once the Fine Threshold has been achieved, this becomes the maximum change ininput power, up or down, which will be applied to the DUT. Default = 1.00 dB
Fine Threshold: Specifies the compression level in which Safe Sweep changes from the COARSE
to the FINE increment. Default = 0.5 dB. This means that, by default, the VNA uses the Fine
Increment adjustment when compression reaches 0.5 dB.
Max Output Power: To protect the VNA from damage, when the VNA port that is connected to the
DUT Output measures the specified value, the input power to the DUT is no longer incremented atthat frequency. In these cases, the compression point would probably not be achieved.

16.6 Gain Compression Calibration
The GCA Calibration Wizard first performs a Source Power Cal. The GCA Source Power Cal is a little
different from a standard Source Power Cal. Although GCA measurements are performed at many
power levels, the GCA source power calibration is performed at a single power level over the
specified frequency span of your GCA measurement. The required source correction from that single
power level is applied to all power levels.
Although it is important for GCA to be able to set the absolute power level to the DUT, it is mostimportant to be able to exactly measure the actual incident power. Therefore, during the GCA Source294

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual
Power Cal, a receiver calibration is applied to the port 1 reference receiver, and indirectly to both test
port receivers during the S-parameter calibration, correcting for impedance mismatch between the
power meter and the VNA source, and the DUT and the VNA source. to enter the calibration wizard.
Press [Cal] > Gain Compression Cal… to enter the calibration wizard.

GC Calibration Wizard
Click next to enter the power calibration, connect the power meter to VNA as the input port, selectthe corresponding port number, and click Take Cal Sweep to perform power calibration.

www.siglent.com

295

SNA6000A User Manual
GC Power Calibration
After completing the power calibration, click next to enter the S-parameter calibration interface,select whether to enable electronic calibration as required, and connect the selected port to thecorresponding calibration part to start calibration. After completing the S-parameter calibration,
receiver calibration will be automatically performed. Click Finish to complete GC calibration.

GC S-parameters Calibration
Click Finish to complete GC calibration.

296

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual

17 External Switch Matrices
17.1 Overview
As the components used in modern communication devices must support more frequency bands
and functions, such as the wide application of WLAN, Bluetooth and GPS, this means that the
number of module RF ports is also increasing, while traditional vector network analyzers only have amaximum of four test ports, in order to measure multi-port devices, The test cable and terminationload need to be changed several times between the various ports of the device under test (DUT) until
all ports have been measured. And this will produce a lot of problems, such as: poor repeatability,
complex operation, complex calculation is not intuitive and a series of problems. To satisfy multiple
port scattering parameter tests at the same time, the number of ports of the vector network analyzer
can be expanded by connecting external matrix switches that allow the external test device to betightly integrated with the VNA itself. Generally called vector network analyzer port expansion device.
With this extension device, an N-port network analyzer can be converted into an M-port network
analyzer (M>N) without modifying the instrument itself. When making multi-port DUT measurements,
multiple measurements can be made with a single connection, improving measurement speed,
reliability and repeatability compared to traditional two/four-port VNA.

17.2 External Matrix switches Introduction
The firmware of the SNA6000A series is able to control switch matrices from SSM5000A directly. It isfast and easy to set up and operate a switch matrix via the graphical user interface. For example, an
SNA6134A in combination with an SSM5144A can seamlessly work as a multiport network analyzer
with up to 24 ports. Greatly improve the test efficiency.

www.siglent.com

297

SNA6000A User Manual

VNA

DUT1

DUT2

DUT3

DUT4

VNA and switch matrix combined expansion port diagram

17.3 Matrix setup step
17.3.1 Required equipment
Network vector analysis port expansion required equipment: SNA6000A, SSM5000A switch matrix,
USB cable, several N-SMA/SMA RF cables. This chapter describes the VNA machines and switch
matrix devices used by default SNA6134A and SSM5144A.

17.3.2 Establish the physical connection
1. Power on the SSM5144A and the SNA6134A, Connect the SSM5144A to the SNA6134A
with a USB cable, and then a message of “The switch matrix plugged in” will displays on the
SNA6134A message bar if the SSM5144 is recognized success.

298

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual

2. Press the System >”External Ports” >”Ext Port Enabled” to enable the function, then thematrix identifierwww.siglent.com

is displayed on the upper right corner of the UI.

299

SNA6000A User Manual

17.3.3 Define the RF configuration
After the VNA is physically connected to the SSM, Touch the “Switch Matrix...” menu to enter the“Switch Matrix RF connections” dialog box. This dialog allows you to define the RF connections
between the VNA and the switch matrices, and the test port numbering.as picture below.

: The A/B/C/D labels in the VNA check box indicate the four physical ports of the vector network
analyzer port.
: The edit box under the A/B/C/D label in the VNA selection box indicates that the RF input port of
the SSM to be selected is connected to the VNA port for expansion. By default, physical Port1 (A) of
the VNA connects to RF input port 1A of the SSM, physical port 2 (B) of the VNA connects to RF
input port 1B of the SSM, physical port 3 (C) of the VNA connects to RF input port 1C of the SSM.
And physical Port4 (D) of the VNA connects to RF input port 1D of the SSM. If you want to customize
the RF Port connection between the VNA and the SSM, click the corresponding edit box under the
A/B/C/D tab and select the port in the “Select Port” dialog box. As shown below:

300

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual

All Port: Indicates all RF ports (including VNA RF ports and SSM RF ports). You can select a
port from the drop-down list.
Unused Port: Indicates an unused RF port number.
Used Port: Indicates the RF port number that is currently in use.
Switch Matrix: Indicates the RF input physical port number of the matrix switch. When A
VNA is physically connected with two SSM, “1A” in the drop-down list of Switch Matrix
represents the RF input port A of the first SSM, “2A” represents the RF input port A of the second
SSM, and the same applies to 1B, 2B, 1C, 2C, 1D, 2D.

: Represents the RF output port of the matrix switch.
: the “Reset” in the Switch Matrix check box indicates that the default port number assignment isrestored for the switch port of the matrix.

www.siglent.com

301

SNA6000A User Manual: The “Renumber” under the Switch Matrix check box means to re-assign automatic port numbers
to the switch matrix.
: The “All Unused” under the Switch Matrix check box indicates that all RF ports of the switch
matrix are set to unused (that is, no connection exists).
: The “Reset” in Switch Matrix RF Connections restores the default port number assignment for all
RF ports (including VNA RF ports and RF ports in the switch matrix).
: The “Renumber” under the Switch Matrix RF Connections check box indicates automatic port
number assignment for all RF switch ports (including VNA RF ports and RF ports of the switch
matrix).
After the RF port configuration is completed, click the "ok" menu option to apply the VNA multiport expansion. and then the expansion ports also can be selected in the function of BasicCalibration, Port Ex tension, Fixtures, Port power.

17.3.4 Setting S Parameters
After VNA port expansion takes effect, connect the SNA6134A’s Port 1, port 2, port 3, and port 4
to the Ports A, B, C, D of the SSM5144A via RF cables (N-SMA). Press the Meas >”SParams” >”Other...” to enter the parameter configuration dialog, user can customize the RF Port
number from the Receiver Port and Source Port drop-down lists. For example, S0512 is select the “5”as the receiver port and the ”12” as the source port, or click the "Edit..." under the Measure dialog
box. To enter the input edit box, enter "0512", and select S0512.

302

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual

17.3.5 Calibrate and measure
After configure the S params, user can do the calibration by Ecal or by mechanical kit before
measuring the DUT. The VNA expansion ports only supports the VNA measurement mode.
Note: In order to obtain more accurate measurement results, the DUT should be fully preheated
before measuring.
Note: The machine should be fully preheated before measuring the DUT in order to obtain moreaccurate measurement results.

www.siglent.com

303

SNA6000A User Manual

18 System setting
Press the System button on the front panel. We can set the IP address, set the date, restore thefactory settings, consult the help document, set the buzzer, self-detection, language setting, obtainthe software and hardware information of the device, and license management in the menu on theright side of the screen.

Figure 18-1 System setting interface

304

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual

18.1 System Configuration
18.1.1 Firmware upgrade
Store the .ADS file in the firmware upgrade package downloaded from the official website in the U disk
root directory, insert the U disk into the USB port of the vector network analyzer, click the Upgradecommand in the System submenu, select the required file in the pop-up file browser, and click OK to
upgrade the firmware. The firmware upgrade process may last for several minutes. When the upgrade
is completed, the device will automatically restart. Any operation that interrupts the upgrade process
may cause the upgrade to fail or even the device cannot start normally. Please keep the U disk stable
and the power supply of the equipment normal during the firmware upgrade process.

18.1.2 File Browser
Click File Browser command to open the file browser, File management can be carried out in the filebrowser.

18.1.3 Date/Time setting
Use the Date & Time command in the System submenu to set the date/time. You can set whether todisplay the date/ time and display the format at the bottom right of the screen and modify the date/ timevalue.

www.siglent.com

305

SNA6000A User Manual

Figure 18-2 Date/Time setting interface

18.1.4 Screenshot setting
Use the Screenshot Settings command in the System submenu to set the screen capture
parameters.

18.1.5 Screensaver
Use the Screensaver command in the System submenu to set the screen saver parameters.

18.1.6 System language
The Language command in the Language submenu can be used to change the language of theequipment. Simplified Chinese and English are supported.

18.1.7 PowerThis menu provides shutdown and restart operation buttons.

306

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual

18.2 Communication interface setting
18.2.1 LAN Status
We can select static or dynamic allocation of LAN-related parameters. Use LAN Status command in
System submenu to set LAN parameters. The SNA6000A series supports dual port configuration, as
shown in the following renderings：

Figure 18-3 Vertical view and rear panel

18.2.2 mDNS Setting
The mDNS host name and description can be set in the mDNS Setting submenu.
The Reset menu button can restore the host name and description of mDNS to the default state.

18.2.3 LXI
You can view LXI related information in the LXI submenu.

www.siglent.com

307

SNA6000A User Manual

18.2.4 VNC Setting
The analyzer supports VNC remote access to web pages. That is to say, the content displayed by the
analyzer is projected to the web page remotely, and at the same time, the mouse and keyboard aresupported to input parameters remotely.
The VNC port can be set in the VNC Setting submenu. When logging in to VNC, the port of VNC
should be consistent with the set port.
The Reset menu button can restore the VNC port to the default state.

18.2.5 Web Setting
You can set the Web password in the Web Setting submenu, and you need to enter the web
password when remotely controlling the analyzer through the web.
The Reset menu button can restore the Web password to the default state.

18.2.6 GPIB
Use the GPIB command in the System submenu to set the GPIB port number.

18.2.7 Net Storage
Set up SNA network storage function, supporting SMB Server, SMB Client, and FTP Server
configuration.

⚫

Introduction to SMB Server

Check 'Start Server' to enable the SMB Server feature, and check 'Self start up startup' toautomatically enable this feature after the device is started.

308

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual

Attention: If the connection cannot be successful after resetting the password, the net configurationneeds to be deleted before the connection can be made.

⚫

Introduction to SMB Client

Configure Server Path and other information on SNA, click the Connect button to connect, and after
successful connection, click the folder button for remote access.

www.siglent.com

309

SNA6000A User Manual⚫

Introduction to FTP Server

Check 'Start Server' to enable the FTP Server function, and check 'Self start up startup' toautomatically enable this function after the device is started.

18.2.8 External Device
Displays information about external devices connected to the analyzer.

310

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual

Figure 18-4 External device information display interface

18.3 Preset
Preset operation and related settings can be performed in Preset submenu.
Preset: Use the Preset command to reset immediately according to the setting reset options.
Preset Option: Use the Preset Option command to set the reset options, and to determine thepreset source:⚫

Default: Load default parameters.

⚫

Last: When the equipment is shut down, the current state will be saved automatically. Use thisoption to restore to the last shutdown state.

⚫

User: Restore the equipment to the user-specified state.

User Preset: Use the User Preset command to specify the user preset status information file.
Confirm Preset: Use the Confirm Preset command to set whether to confirm before reset.
Power On Option: Use the Power On Option command to set the default source of equipment reset
when the equipment starts.

www.siglent.com

311

SNA6000A User Manual

18.4 Factory Reset⚫

Configuration files (Selected by default) Indicates that the equipment is restored to the factory
default state, but the files saved by the user to local will not be deleted.

⚫

User data (Optional), user can selectively delete the files saved to local.

⚫

Secure delete (optional), If the check box is checked, the original data will be overwritten withrandom data, achieving the effect of permanent deletion, which may take a little longer. If thecheck box is not checked, the normal deletion mode will be used.

Figure 18-5 Select the saved file⚫

Configuration files and User data If user select both, the equipment is restored to the factory
default state and deletes the files saved to local by users.

18.5 Help information
18.5.1 Help and About
In the Help submenu, we can open the help document (Help command) or view the equipment
information (About command).

312

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual

18.5.2 Message Setting
In the Message Setting submenu, we can open the message setting dialog.
⚫

Enable Message Display (Selected by default) Check to display all messages as they occur.
Clear to suppress the display of messages. You can still view them in the View Message.

⚫

Enable Power Unlevel Detection (Selected by default) Check to enable the power unlevel
detection. Clear to close.

18.5.3 View Message
In the View Message submenu, we can open the message log dialog.

18.6 Buzzer
We can set the sound in the Buzzer submenu.
Buzzer: Use the Buzzer command to turn the device sound on or off.
Complete Test: Use the Complete Test command to test the completion tone.
Complete Buzzer: Use the Complete Buzzer command to turn the completion tone on or off.
Warning Test: Use the Warning Test command to test the alarm tone.
Warning Buzzer: Use the Warning Buzzer command to turn on or off the alarm tone.
Touch Buzzer: Use the Touch Buzzer command to turn on or off the touchscreen keystone.

18.7 Self-Test
18.7.1 Key and touch screen test
In the Self Test submenu, we can perform keyboard self-test (Key Test command), touch screen
self-test (Touch Test command), screen self-test (Screen Test command) and LED self test (LED
Test command).

www.siglent.com

313

SNA6000A User Manual

18.8 Options
Refer to the procedures below to activate the options you have purchased.
1

Press

System> “Options”-> “License…”

2

Enter the license key in the onscreen window.

Press Enter to confirm your input and terminate the license key input. Or load the .lic file andpress “Scan U-disk” to select the corresponding .lic file in the memory.

⚫

Option Application:

Option
SA
TDA
TDR
MT
PM
SMM
FCA
GC

Supported Model
SNA6000A
SNA6000A
SNA6000A
SNA6000A
SNA6000A
SNA6000A
SNA6000A
SNA6000A

Application
Spectrum Analyzer
Time Domain
TDR Measurement
Material Measurement
Pulse Measurement
Scalar Mixer Measurement
Vector Mixer Measurement
Gain Compression Measurement

18.9 External Ports
Used to define external logical port, source port, reference receiver port and test receiver port.

314

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User Manual

19 Service and Support
19.1 Ordering and activating the options
There are two ways for you:1.

Pre-activate the options by SIGLENT factory.
If you order a instrument and options, SIGLENT factory will activate the options for you before
delivery.

2.

Post-activate the options by yourself.
If you want to activate options on a instrument that you are using.

www.siglent.com

315

SNA6000A User Manual

19.2 Warranty overview
SIGLENT guarantees that the products produced and sold will not have defects in materials andtechnology within three years from the date of delivery by authorized distributors. If the product is
defective within the warranty period, SIGLENT will provide repair or replacement service according to
the detailed provisions of the warranty.
For service or a complete copy of the warranty, please contact your nearest SIGLENT sales andservice office. SIGLENT makes no other warranty, express or implied, except as provided in thissummary or the applicable warranty, including but not limited to the implied warranty ofmerchantability and special applicability. SIGLENT shall not be liable for any indirect, special orconsequential damages.

19.3 Contact SIGLENT
Headquarters:
SIGLENT Technologies Co., Ltd
Add: Bldg No.4 & No.5, Antongda Industrial Zone, 3rd Liuxian Road,
Bao'an District, Shenzhen, 518101, China
Tel: + 86 755 3688 7876
Fax: + 86 755 3359 1582
Email: sales@siglent.com
Website: int.siglent.com

North America:
SIGLENT Technologies America, Inc
6557 Cochran Rd Solon, Ohio 44139
Tel: 440-398-5800
Toll Free: 877-515-5551
Fax: 440-399-1211
Email: info@siglentna.com
Website: www.siglentna.com

316

www.siglent.com

SNA6000A User ManualEurope:SIGLENT Technologies Germany GmbH
Add: Staetzlinger Str. 70
86165 Augsburg, Germany
Tel: +49(0)-821-666 0 111 0
Fax: +49(0)-821-666 0 111 22
Email: info-eu@siglent.com
Website: www.siglenteu.com

www.siglent.com

317

About SIGLENTSIGLENT is an international high-tech company, concentrating on R&D, sales,
production and services of electronic test & measurement instruments.
SIGLENT first began developing digital oscilloscopes independently in 2002.
After more than a decade of continuous development, SIGLENT has extended
its product line to include digital oscilloscopes, isolated handheld
oscilloscopes,

function/arbitrary

waveform

generators,

RF/MWsignalgenerators, spectrum analyzers, vector network analyzers, digital multimeters,
DC power supplies, electronic loads and other general purpose test
instrumentation. Since its first oscilloscope was launched in 2005, SIGLENT
has become the fastest growing manufacturer of digital oscilloscopes. We
firmly believe that today SIGLENT is the best value in electronic test &measurement.

Headquarters:
SIGLENT Technologies Co., Ltd
Add: Bldg No.4 & No.5, Antongda Industrial

Zone, 3rd Liuxian Road, Bao'an District,
Shenzhen, 518101, China
Tel: + 86 755 3688 7876
Fax: + 86 755 3359 1582
Email: sales@siglent.com
Website: int.siglent.com

North America:
SIGLENT Technologies America, Inc
6557 Cochran Rd Solon, Ohio 44139
Tel: 440-398-5800
Toll Free: 877-515-5551
Fax: 440-399-1211

Email: info@siglentna.com
Website: www.siglentna.com

Europe:SIGLENT Technologies Germany GmbH
Add: Staetzlinger Str. 70
86165 Augsburg, Germany
Tel: +49(0)-821-666 0 111 0
Fax: +49(0)-821-666 0 111 22
Email: info-eu@siglent.com
Website: www.siglenteu.com

Follow us on
Facebook: SiglentTech